Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Technical Guide
Types MiCOM P342, P343

Generator Protection Relays
Technical Guide
Volume 1
TECHNICAL GUIDE TG8614A
MiCOM P342, P343 Volume 1
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Contents
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

SAFETY SECTION
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION NOTES
Includes Publication R6614,
P340 Series Generator Protection Relays
CHAPTER 3. RELAY DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 4. TECHNICAL DATA
CHAPTER 5. SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
APPENDIX A. COURIER DATA BASE
APPENDIX B. WIRING DIAGRAMS
Technical Guide
Type MiCOM 342, 343
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause
serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have
been reduced.
The electronic circuits of ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd products are immune to the relevant levels
of electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by
withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it
becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high
reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment
by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and
IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is
preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k – 10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not
available, you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static.
Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in
BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the equipment.
Health and safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in
a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels which may be used on the equipment or in the
product documentation, is given below.
Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective/safety *earth terminal
Functional *earth terminal.

Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective/
safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly eg. power supply.
*Note: The term earth used throughout the product documentation is the direct
equivalent of the North American term ground.
Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or
servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present
a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for
the wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth
terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug
connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a
safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5 mm2, unless otherwise stated in
the technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity;
CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental
limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock
or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the
equipment.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whilst it is energised,
since this may result in damage.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.
Decommissioning and Disposal
Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include

capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric
shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the
supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external
terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water
courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a
safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have
them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid
short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation,may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment
is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation.
Insulation class: IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 This equipment requires a

Class I protective (safety) earth
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 connection to ensure user
Class I safety.
Installation IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Distribution level, fixed

Category Category III installation. Equipment in
(Overvoltage): EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 this category is qualification
Category III tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs,
500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also
between independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated by

Pollution degree 2 reference to generic safety
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 standards.
Pollution degree 2
Product safety: 73/23/EEC Compliance with the European

Commission Low Voltage
Directive.
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated

EN 60950: 1992/A11:1997 by reference to generic safety
standards.
Technical Guide
Chapter 1
Introduction
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Chapter 1
Contents
Page 1 of 1
1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM 1
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 2
3 USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 4
3.1 Introduction to the relay 4
3.1.1 Front panel 4
3.1.2 Relay rear panel 5
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 6
3.3 Menu structure 8
3.3.1 Protection settings 9
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings 9
3.3.3 Control and support settings 9
3.4 Password protection 9
3.5 Relay confirguration 10
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 11
3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out 12
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 12
3.6.3 Password entry 12
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records 13
3.6.5 Settings changes 13
3.7 Front communication port user interface 14
3.8 Rear communication port user interface 16
3.8.1 Courier communication 16
3.8.2 Modbus communication 18
3.8.3 IEC60807-5 CS 103 communication 20
Figure 1 Relay front view 4

Figure 2 Relay rear view 6
Figure 3 Menu structure 8
Figure 4 Front panel user interface 11
Figure 5 Front port connection 14
Figure 6 PC - relay signal connection 15
Figure 7 Remote communication connection arrangements 17
Page 1 of 21
Section 1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply

requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from
ALSTOM.
Central to the MiCOM concept is fexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through
extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply
control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
• P range protection relays;
• C range control products;
• M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
• S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the

state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records.
They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a
control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical
publication which can be obtained from:
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd, or your local sales office. Alternatively
visit our web site.
Page 2 of 21
Section 2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES
The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM

protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and
application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay
and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection
engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the
protection of the power system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is
intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation,
commissioning and maintenance of the relay.
The chapter content within each volume is summarised below.
Volume 1 Technical Guide

Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1 Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing
how to start using the relay.
Chapter 2 Application notes (includes a copy of publication RXXXX)
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay
including both the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such
as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable
scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system
applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical
worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
Chapter 3 Relay description
Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This
chapter includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics
of the relay.
Chapter 4 Technical data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended
operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with
technical standards is quoted where appropriate.
Chapter 5 Communications and interface guide
This chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access
the settings database stored within the relay. The chapter also gives
information on each of the communication protocols that can be used with
the relay, and is intended to allow the user to design a custom interface to
a SCADA system.
Page 3 of 21
Appendix A Relay menu database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC60870-5-103

Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
Volume 2 Operation Guide

Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1 Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing
how to start using the relay.
Chapter 2 Installation (includes a copy of publication RXXXX)
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the
relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is
provided incorporating earthing recommendations.
Chapter 3 Commissioning and maintenance
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the
calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for
the relay is outlined.
Chapter 4 Problem analysis.
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of
action.
Appendix A Relay menu database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC60870-5-103
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
Repair Form
Page 4 of 21
Section 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both
from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear
communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this
section to describe how to get started using the relay.
3.1 Introduction to the relay
3.1.1 Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the
top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front
panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover
in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover
does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but
allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is
required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and
removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is
secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges
of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel
until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to
release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial No and I*,V Ratings Top cover
Zn 1/5 A 50/60 Hz
SER No Vx V
DIAG No Vn V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed ALARM
function
LEDs OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
User programmable
= CLEAR function LEDs
= READ
= ENTER
Keypad
SK1 SK2
Bottom
cover
Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port
Figure 1: Relay front view
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Page 5 of 21
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
• a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
• a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (⇐, ⇒, ⇑ and ⇓), an enter key (↵),
a clear key (C), and a read key (&).
• 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
• the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating
information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
• battery compartment to hold the ½AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
• a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the
relay (up to 15m distance) via an RS232 serial data connection.
• a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high
speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to
indicate the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip
LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This
may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash
until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to
constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should
be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate
that there is an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the
healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage
signals*, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the
rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional. Also connected at the rear is the
twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485/K Bus communication port, in addition
to the optional IRIG-B time synchronising input and optical fibre communication
port.

Page 6 of 21
Optional IRIG-B board Digital input connections
A B C D E F
Power supply
connection
IRIG B
TX
PORT 1
Rear comms port

(RS485)
RX
Current* and voltage Digital output

input terminals (relays) connections
Figure 2: Relay rear view

Refer to the wiring diagram in appendix 2 for complete connection details.
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

The relay has three user interfaces:
• the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
• the front port which supports Courier communication.
• the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus or
IEC60870-5-103. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the
relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from
the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.

Page 7 of 21
Keypad/LCD Courier Modbus IEC60870

Display & modification of • • •
all settings
Digital I/O signal status • • • •
Display/extraction of • • • •
measurements
Display/extraction of • • •
fault records
Display/extraction of • • • •
event & alarm records
Extraction of disturbance • •
records
Programmable scheme •
logic settings
Reset of fault & alarm • • • •
records
Clear event & fault • • •
records
Time synchronisation • • •
Control commands • • • •
Table 1

Page 8 of 21
3.3 Menu structure

The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference
to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column
contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings
are contained within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of
each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained
within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be
made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is
given in Appendix A of the manual.
Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data View records Overcurrent Earth fault
Column
data
settings
Control & support Group 1
Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4
Figure 3: Menu structure

All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection
settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support, (C&S) settings.
One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which
category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used
by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or
disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a
temporary ‘scratchpad’. It activates all the new settings together, but only after
it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique
is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that
are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same
time.

Page 9 of 21
3.3.1 Protection settings

The protection settings include the following items:
• protection element settings
• scheme logic settings
• auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
• fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the
same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active
group, and is used by the protection elements.
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings
The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger
position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal
sources that trigger the recording.
3.3.3 Control & support settings
The control & support settings include:
• relay configuration settings
• open/close circuit breaker*
• CT & VT ratio settings*
• reset LEDs
• active protection setting group
• password & language settings
• circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
• communications settings
• measurement settings
• event & fault record settings
• user interface settings
• commissioning settings
3.4 Password protection

The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is
enabled determines which of the relay’s settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are
summarised in Table 2.

Page 10 of 21
Access Level Operations Enabled

Level 0 Read access to all settings, alarms, event
No password required records and fault records.
Level 1 As level 0 plus:
Password 1 or 2 required Control commands, e.g.
circuit breaker open/close.
Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Password 2 required All other settings.
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory
default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it
has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a
prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’
cell in the ‘System data’ column of the menu. The level of access is
independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is
enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at
level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access
level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each
interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact ALSTOM
with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an
interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System
data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also
be found as one of the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the
relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set
in the ‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the
menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is
enabled).
3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different
protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting
of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to
enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated
with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in
the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’
column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’.
The configuration column controls which of the 4 protection settings groups is
selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group
can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present
active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active
group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of
protection settings to be copied to another group.

Page 11 of 21
To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be
copied, then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to
be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary
scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set
the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is
possible to set the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default
values to all of the relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The
default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used
by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all
settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in
communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do
not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the
relay, with the information displayed on the LCD.
The ⇐, ⇒, ⇑ and ⇓ keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of
these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both
setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held
depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
System Other default displays

frequency 3-phase voltage
Alarm messages
Date and time

C
C
Column 1 Column 2 Column n

Group 4
Sytem data View records Other column headings Overcurrent
Data 1.1 Data 2.1 Data n.1

Language Last record |>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
Data 1.2 Data 2.2 from any menu cell Data n.2
Password Time and date |>1 directional
Other setting Other setting Other setting

cells in cells in cells in
column 1 column 2 column n
Data 1.n Data 2.n Data n.n

Password C A voltage |>char angle
level 2
Figure 4: Front panel user interface

Page 12 of 21
3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out

The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out
and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15
minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have
not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date
and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default
display is selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’
column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can
be scrolled through using the ⇐ and ⇒ keys. However the menu selected
default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever
there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection
alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults
present
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is
not affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure
shown in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the ⇓ key will display
the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the ⇐ and
⇒ keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using
the ⇓ and ⇑ keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding
the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key C. It is
only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to
the default display press the [up arrow symbol] key or the clear key C from any
of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display
from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the ⇑ key, as
the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display,
the ⇑ key must be released and pressed again.
3.6.3 Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter Password
**** Level 1
Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be
changed. Press the ⇑ and ⇓ keys to vary each character between A and Z. To
move between the character fields of the password, use the ⇐ and ⇒ keys.
The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key ↵. The display will revert
to ‘Enter Password’ if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message
will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and

Page 13 of 21
if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the
selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit
to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the
password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press
the clear key C. Alternatively, the password can be entered using the
‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to
the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is
possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by
moving to the ‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing
the clear key C instead of entering a password.
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default
display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either
be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To
view the alarm messages press the read key &. When all alarms have been
viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant
illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To
scroll through the pages of this use the & key. When all pages of the fault
record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms
To clear all alarm messages press C; to return to the alarms/faults present

display and leave the alarms uncleared, press &.. Depending on the
password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password
before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry).
When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as
will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer
has been entered using the & key, the C key can be pressed, this will move
the display straight to the fault record. Pressing C again will move straight to
the alarm reset prompt where pressing C once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5 Setting changes
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant
cell. To change the cell value press the enter key ↵, which will bring up a
flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will
only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the
prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be
changed by pressing the ⇑ or ⇓ keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary
value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be
selected using the ⇐ and ⇒ keys. When the desired new value has been
reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing ↵. Alternatively,
the new value will be discarded either if the clear button C is pressed or if the
menu time-out occurs.

Page 14 of 21
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes
must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all
required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and
press the ⇑ key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt
will be given:
Upate settings?
Enter or Clear
Pressing ¿ will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing C will cause
the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the
setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the
setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be
updated immediately after they are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.
3.7 Front communication port user interface
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector
located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m
distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication
protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM
T&D Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection
relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings
program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows NT based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK2
SK1
25 pin
download/monitor port
9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)
Figure 5: Front port connection

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common

Page 15 of 21
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be
connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are
normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin
connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way 9 Way
Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected
to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Tx pin on the PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a
DTE with pin connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector
is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to
pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is
connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial
connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or
if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
DCE Serial data connector DTE

Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
Figure 6: PC-relay signal connection

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The
relay’s communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table
below:
Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bits/s
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit
(even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long
the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no
messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password
access level that has been enabled will be revoked.

Page 16 of 21
3.8 Rear communication port user interface

The rear port can support one of three communication protocols (Courier,
Modbus, IEC60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay
is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw
connector located on the back of the relay. See appendix 2 for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/RS485 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to
a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal
connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus
option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity
conscious, however for Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 care must be taken to
observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the
‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move
to the ‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the
communication protocol being used by the rear port.
3.8.1 Courier communication
Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection
& Control to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier
works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the
form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is
requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master
unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T, ACCESS or a SCADA system.
MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is
specifically designed for setting changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using
Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter is required. This unit is
available from ALSTOM Protection & Control Ltd. A typical connection
arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other
possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master
station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of
the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32
relays connected to it.

Page 17 of 21
Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay MiCOM relay MiCOM relay
RS232 K-Bus
PC
KITZ protocol
converter
PC serial port
Modem
Public switched Courier master station

telephone network eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station

eg. area control centre
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements

Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the
‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’
column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relay’s
address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed
baud rate of 64kbits/s. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the
column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication
protocol:

Page 18 of 21
Protocol
Courier
The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:
Remote address
1
Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in

figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that
messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only.
Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address
which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same
Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including
revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be
set between 1 and 30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using
an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save
changes’ cell of the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1
do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 Modbus communication
Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for
network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master
device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to
the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action.
Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear
port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relay’s communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the
‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’
column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described
below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to
the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol:

Page 19 of 21
Protocol
Modbus
The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:
Modbus address
23
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is

necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer
number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two
relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
Inactivity timer
10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including
revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be
set between 1 and 30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600 bits/s
Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by

the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
Modbus master station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:
Parity
None

Page 20 of 21
The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
Modbus master station.
3.8.3 IEC60870-5 CS 103 communication
The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part
5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-
1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The
standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair
connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC60870-5-103, the
rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection
to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station. The method of communication uses
standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication
protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD
user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in
the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’
column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC60870-5-103 which are
described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column
heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol:
Protocol
IEC60870-5-103
The next cell down controls the IEC60870-5-103 address of the relay:
Remote address
162
Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC60870-5-103 spur, and therefore

it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from
the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC60870-5-103 uses
an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important
that no two relays have the same IEC60870-5-103 address. The IEC60870-5-
103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:
Baud rate
9600bits/s
IEC60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are

supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
IEC60870-5-103 master station.

Page 21 of 21
The next cell down controls the period between IEC60870-5-103 measurements:
Measure’t period
30.00 s
The IEC60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at

regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this
cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Physical link
RS485
The default setting is to select the electrical RS485 connection. If the optional
fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to
‘Fibre optic’.
The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this
interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol*.
Function type
226

Technical Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Chapter 2
Applications Notes
Contents
1. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Protection of generators 1
1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays 2
1.2.1 Protection features 2
1.2.2 Non-protection features 3
2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 4
2.1 Configuration column 4
2.2 CT and VT ratios 6
2.3 Generator differential protection 7
2.3.1 Biased differential protection 9
2.3.2 Setting guidelines for biased differential protection 10
2.3.3 High impedance differential protection 11
2.3.4 Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection 12
2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection 16
2.4.1 Application of timer hold facility 17
2.4.2 Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection 18
2.5 System back-up protection 19
2.5.1 Voltage dependant overcurrent protection 21
2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection 21
2.5.1.2 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function 22
2.5.1.3 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 24
2.5.1.4 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent functions 25
2.5.2 Under impedance protection 26
2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function 27
2.6 Undervoltage protection function (27) 28
2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection 29
2.7 Overvoltage protection 30
2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection 31
2.8 Underfrequency protection 32
2.8.1 Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection 33
2.9 Overfrequency protection function 35
2.9.1 Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection 36
2.10 Field failure protection function (40) 36
2.10.1 Setting guidelines for field failure protection 38
2.10.1.1 Impedance element 1 39
2.10.1.2 Impedance element 2 40
2.10.1.3 Power factor element 40
2.11 Negative phase sequence thermal protection 40
2.11.1 Setting guidelines for negative phase sequency thermal protection 42
2.12 Reverse power/over power/low forward power 44
2.12.1 Low forward power protection function 45
2.12.1.1 Low forward power setting guideline 46
2.12.2 Reverse power protection function 46
2.12.2.1 Reverse power setting guideline 48
2.12.3 Over power protection 48
2.12.3.1 Over power setting guideline 48
2.13 Stator earth fault protection function 48
2.13.1 Setting guideline for stator earth fault protection 50
2.14 Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection function 51
2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement
protection 53
Contents
2.15 Sensitive earth fault protection function 54

2.15.1 Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection 56
2.16 Restricted earth fault protection 57
2.16.1 Low impedance biased differential REF protection 58
2.16.1.1 Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection 61
2.16.2 High impedance restricted earth fault protection 61
2.16.2.1 Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection 63
2.17 100% stator earth fault protection 66
2.17.1 Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection 68
2.18 overfluxing protection 68
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection 70
2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection 70
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for dead machine protection 71
2.20 Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection 72
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection 73
2.21 Pole slipping protection 74
2.21.1 Reverse power protection 74
2.21.2 System back-up protection function 75
2.21.3 Field failure protection function 75
2.22 Circuit breaker failure protection 77
2.22.1 Breaker failure protection configurations 77
2.22.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers 77
2.22.3 Typical settings 79
2.22.3.1 Breaker fail timer settings 79
2.22.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings 80
2.23 Breaker flashover protection 80
2.24 Blocked overcurrent protection 81
3. APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 83
3.1 VT supervision 83
3.1.1 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions 84
3.1.2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation 84
3.1.3 Menu settings 84
3.2 CT supervision 85
3.2.1 The CT supervision feature 86
3.2.2 Setting the CT supervision element 86
3.2.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring 87
3.2.4 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 87
3.2.4.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features 88
3.2.4.2 Circuit breaker state monitoring features 89
3.2.5 Event and fault records 89
3.2.6 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs 91
3.2.7 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts 91
3.2.8 Relay alarm conditions 91
3.2.9 Protection element starts and trips 92
3.2.10 General events 92
3.2.11 Fault records 92
3.2.12 Maintenance reports 92
3.2.13 Setting changes 93
3.2.14 Resetting of event/fault records 93
3.2.15 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software 93
3.3 Disturbance recorder 94
Contents
3.4 Measurements 95
3.4.1 Measured voltages and currents 96
3.4.2 Sequence voltages and currents 96
3.4.3 Power and energy quantities 96
3.4.4 RMS voltages and currents 97
3.4.5 Demand values 97
3.4.5.1 Fixed demand values 97
3.4.5.2 Rolling demand values 97
3.4.5.3 Peak demand values 97
3.4.6 Settings 97
3.4.6.1 Default display 98
3.4.6.2 Local values 98
3.4.6.3 Remote values 98
3.4.6.4 Measurement REF 98
3.4.6.5 Measurement mode 98
3.4.6.6 Fixed demand period 98
3.4.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods 98
3.4.6.8 Distance 98
3.4.6.9 Fault location 98
4 CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 99
4.1 Generator differential function 99
4.1.1 Biased differential protection 99
4.1.2 High impedance differential protection 99
4.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative
phase sequence protection functions 99
4.3 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual
current input 100
4.3.1 Line current transformers 100
4.3.2 Core balanced current transformers 100
4.4 Stator earth fault protection function and sensitive
directional earth fault current polarising input 101
4.5 Reverse and low forward power protection functions 101
4.5.1 Protection class current transformers 101
4.6 Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard
protection classification to a kneepoint voltage 102
Page 1 of 103
Section 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Protection of generators

An AC generator forms the electromechanical stage of an overall energy
conversion process that results in the production of electrical power. A
reciprocating engine, or one of many forms of turbine, acts as a prime mover
to provide the rotary mechanical input to the alternator.
There are many forms of generating plant that utilise a variety of sources of
energy available, eg. combustion of fossil fuels, hydro dams and nuclear
fission. Generation schemes may be provided for base-load production, peak-
lopping or for providing standby power.
Electrical protection should quickly detect and initiate shutdown for major
electrical faults associated with the generating plant and, less urgently, to
detect abnormal operating conditions which may lead to plant damage.
Abnormal electrical conditions can arise as a result of a failure within the
generating plant itself, but can also be externally imposed on the generator.
Common categories of faults and abnormal conditions which can be detected
electrically are listed as follows: (Not all conditions have to be detected for all
applications.)
Major electrical faults
Insulation failure of stator windings or connections
Secondary electrical faults
Insulation failure of excitation system
Failure of excitation system
Unsynchronised over voltage
Abnormal prime mover or control conditions
Failure of prime mover
Over frequency
Over fluxing
Dead machine energisation
Breaker flashover
System related
Feeding an uncleared fault
Prolonged or heavy unbalanced loading
Prolonged or heavy overload
Loss of synchronism
Over frequency
Under frequency
Synchronised over voltage
Over fluxing
Undervoltage
Page 2 of 103
In addition various types of mechanical protection may be necessary, such as

vibration detection, lubricant and coolant monitoring, temperature detection
etc.
The action required following response of an electrical or mechanical protection
is often categorised as follows:
Urgent shutdown
Non-urgent shutdown
Alarm only
An urgent shutdown would be required, for example, if a phase to phase fault
occurred within the generator electrical connections. A non-urgent shutdown
might be sequential, where the prime mover may be shutdown prior to
electrically unloading the generator, in order to avoid over speed. A non-urgent
shutdown may be initiated in the case of continued unbalanced loading. In this
case, it is desirable that an alarm should be given before shutdown becomes
necessary, in order to allow for operator intervention to remedy the situation.
For urgent tripping, it may be desirable to electrically maintain the shutdown
condition with latching protection output contacts, which would require manual
resetting. For a non-urgent shutdown, it may be required that the output
contacts are self-reset, so that production of power can be re-started as soon as
possible.
1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays
MiCOM relays are a new range of products from ALSTOM T&D
Protection & Control Ltd. Using the latest numerical technology the platform
includes devices designed for the application to a wide range of power system
plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables.
Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in
order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such
product in the range is the P340 Generator protection relays. The relays have
been designed to cater for the protection of a wide range of generators from
small machines, providing standby power on industrial sites, to large machines
in power stations providing for the base load on the grid transmission network.
The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid
with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be
accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.
1.2.1 Protection features
The P340 relays contain a wide variety of protection functions for the protection
of generators. There are 2 separate models available to cover a wide range of
applications. The protection features of each model are summarised below:
Generator differential protection - Phase segregated differential protection
operating on a biased or high impedance principle. Provides high speed,
discriminative protection for all fault types. {P343 only}
Phase fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up
protection.
Voltage dependent overcurrent/under impedance protection - Back-up
protection for generators with limited fault current capacity.
Page 3 of 103
Earth fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up

protection.
Neutral voltage displacement protection - Provides protection against earth
faults on high impedance earthed systems.
Sensitive directional earth fault protection - Discriminative earth fault
protection for parallel connected generators.
100% Stator earth fault protection - Provides protection against earth faults
close to the generator star point. {P343 only}
Under/overvoltage protection - Two stage undervoltage and two stage
overvoltage protection.
Under/over frequency protection - Four stage under frequency and two stage
over frequency protection.
Reverse power - Protection against loss of prime mover.
Low forward power - Provides an interlock for non urgent tripping.
Over power - Back-up overload protection.
Field failure - Two stage element for protection against loss of excitation.
Negative phase sequence protection - Provides protection against
unbalanced loading which can cause overheating of the generator.
Overfluxing - Provides protection for the generator / transformer against
unusual voltage or frequency conditions.
Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) protection - Protection
against inadvertent closing of the generator circuit breaker when the
machine is not running. {P343 only}
Voltage transformer supervision - To prevent mal-operation of voltage
dependent protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal.
Thermal protection via RTD inputs - Thermal protection for the machine
provided by measuring the temperature of winding/bearings etc. via
resistive thermal devices embedded within the machine. 10 RTD inputs can
be provided.
Programmable scheme logic - Allowing user defined protection and control
logic to suit particular customer applications.
1.2.2 Non-protection features
Below is a summary of the P340 relay non-protective features.
Measurements - Various measurements of value for display on the relay or
accessed from the serial communications, eg. Currents, voltages,
temperature etc.
Fault/event/disturbance records - Available from the serial communications
or on the relay display (fault records only on relay display).
Real time clock / time synchronisation - Time synchronisation possible from
relay IRIG-B input.
Four setting groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative
power system arrangements or customer specific applications.
Page 4 of 103
Remote serial communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The

following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS,
WorldFIP and IEC870-5-103 (VDEW).
Continuous self monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines
to provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
Circuit breaker state monitoring - Provides indication of discrepancy between
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Circuit breaker condition monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs
regarding the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and
the breaker operating time.
Commissioning test facilities.
Section 2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to

where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from
the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually
applied to the relay.
2.1 Configuration column
The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the “ CONFIGURATION”
column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions.
The aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a
single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made
invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Configuration column, with
default settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also
provided.
Menu text Default setting Available setting Function

CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults No Operation No Operation Restore default
All Settings settings to any
Setting Group 1 or all group
Setting Group 2 of settings
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4
Setting Group Select via Menu Select via Menu Change setting
Select via Optos groups by?
Active Settings Group 1 Group 1 Select active
Group 2 setting group
Group 3 used for protection
Group 4 settings
Save Changes No Operation No Operation Saves all setting
Save changes from
Abort buffer memory into
stored settings
Page 5 of 103
Copy From Group 1 Group1,2,3 or 4 Selects a group of

settings to copy to
the group
designated in
“ Copy to” cell
Copy To No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4 Copies the group of
settings selected in
the “ Copy from”
cell to the selected
setting group
Setting Group 1 Enabled Enabled or Disabled Selects if Group 1
settings are
available on the
relay
Setting Group 2 Disabled Enabled or Disabled Selects if Group 2
settings are
available on the
relay
settings are
available on the
relay
settings are
available on the
relay
Gen Differential Enabled Enabled or Disabled Enables protection
element in the relay
Power Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Field Failure Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
NPS Thermal Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
System Backup Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Overcurrent Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Standard E/F Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
SEF/REF Prot’n Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Residual O/V
NVD Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
100% Stator
E/F Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
V/Hz Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Dead Machine Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Volt Protection Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Freq Protection Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Page 6 of 103
RTD Inputs Enabled Enabled or Disabled “

CB Fail Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Supervision Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Input Labels Visible Invisible or Visible Makes settings
visible in the relay
menu
Output Labels Visible Invisible or Visible “
RTD Labels Visible Invisible or Visible “
CT & VT Ratios Visible Invisible or Visible “
Event Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Disturb Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Measure’t Setup Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Comms Settings Visible Invisible or Visible “
Commission
Tests Visible Invisible or Visible “
Setting Values Primary Primary or Selects if relay
Secondary protection settings
are displayed in
primary or
secondary current/
voltage values
2.2 CT and VT ratios

The P340 relay allows the current, voltage and impedance settings to be
applied to the relay in either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by
programming the “ Setting Values” cell of the “ CONFIGURATION” column to
either ‘Primary’ or ‘Secondary’. When this cell is set to ‘Primary’, all current,
voltage and impedance setting values are scaled by the programmed CT and
VT ratios. These are found in the “ VT & CT RATIOS” column, settings for which
are shown below.
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min Max
CT AND VT RATIOS
Main VT Primary 110 V 100 V 1000000 V 1V
Main VT Sec’y 110 V 80 V 140 V 110 V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
400 V 360 V 480 V 400 V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
NVD VT Primary 110 V 100 V 1000000 V 1V

Page 7 of 103
NVD VT
Secondary 110 V 80 V 140 V 110V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
400 V 360 V 480 V 400 V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
Phase CT Primary 1 1 30000 1

Phase CT Sec’y 1 1 5 4
E/F CT Primary 1 1 30000 1
E/F CT Secondary 1 1 5 4
SEF CT Primary 1 1 30000 1
SEF CT Secondary 1 1 5 4
2.3 Generator differential protection

Failure of stator windings, or connection insulation, can result in severe damage
to the windings and stator core. The extent of the damage will depend upon
the fault current level and the duration of the fault. Protection should be applied
to limit the degree of damage in order to limit repair costs. For primary
generating plant, high-speed disconnection of the plant from the power system
may also be necessary to maintain system stability.
For generators rated above 1 MVA, it is common to apply generator differential
protection. This form of unit protection allows discriminative detection of
winding faults, with no intentional time delay, where a significant fault current
arises. The zone of protection, defined by the location of the CTs, should be
arranged to overlap protection for other items of plant, such as a busbar or a
step-up transformer.
Circulating current differential protection operates on the principle that current
entering and leaving a zone of protection will be equal. Any difference
between these currents is indicative of a fault being present in the zone. If CTs
are connected as shown in Figure 1 it can be seen that current flowing through
the zone of protection will cause current to circulate around the secondary
wiring. If the CTs are of the same ratio and have identical magnetising
characteristics they will produce identical secondary currents and hence zero
current will flow through the relay. If a fault exists within the zone of protection
there will be a difference between the output from each CT; this difference
flowing through the relay causing it to operate.
Page 8 of 103
Protected zone
Differential relay
Figure 1: Principle of circulating current differential protection

Heavy through current, arising from an external fault condition, can cause one
CT to saturate more than the other, resulting in a difference between the
secondary current produced by each CT. It is essential to stabilise the
protection for these conditions. Two methods are commonly used. A biasing
technique, where the relay setting is raised as through current increases.
Alternatively, a high impedance technique, where the relay impedance is such
that under maximum through fault conditions, the current in the differential
element is insufficient for the relay to operate.
The generator differential protection function available in the P343 relay can be
used in either biased differential or high impedance differential mode. Both
modes of operation are equally valid; users may have a preference for one
over the other. The operating principle of each is described in the following
sections.
A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate the tripping of each
phase of differential protection (DDB 181, DDB182, DDB183), in addition a 3
phase trip DDB signal is provided (DDB180). These signals are used to operate
the output relays and trigger the disturbance recorder as programmed into the
Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL). The state of the DDB signals can also be
programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the
“ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Differential protection element,
including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:-
Page 9 of 103
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size

Min Max
GROUP 1
GEN DIFF
GenDiff Function Biased Disabled, Biased, N/A
High Impedance
Gen Diff Is1 0.1 0.05 In A 0.5 In A 0.01 In A
Gen Diff k1 0 0 20% 5%
Gen Diff Is2 0.1 0.05 In A 0.5 In A 0.01 In A
Gen Diff k2 0 0 20% 5%
2.3.1 Biased differential protection

In a biased differential relay, the through current is used to increase the setting
of the differential element. For heavy through faults, it is unlikely that the CT
outputs at each zone end will be identical, due to the effects of CT saturation.
In this case a differential current can be produced. However, the biasing will
increase the relay setting, such that the differential spill current is insufficient to
operate the relay.
The through current is calculated as the average of the scalar sum of the current
entering and leaving the zone of protection. This calculated through current is
then used to apply a percentage bias to increase the differential setting. The
percentage bias can be varied to give the operating characteristic shown in
Figure 2.
I1 I2
I DIFF
= I 1+ I 2
Operate
K2
Restrain
Is1 K1
Is2 I BIAS = I1+ I2

2
Figure 2: Biased differential protection operating characteristic
Two bias settings are provided in the P343 relay. The initial bias slope, “Gen
Diff k1” , is applied for through currents upto “Gen Diff Is2” ,. The second bias
slope, “Gen Diff k2” , is applied for through currents above the Gen Diff Is2
setting.
Page 10 of 103
The operating current of the biased differential element, for any value of
through current, can be calculated using the following formulae
I1 + I 2
I BIAS =
2
I DIFF ≥ K 2 .I BIAS - (K 2 - K 1 )I S2 + I S1 Where I BIAS > I S2
I DIFF ≥ K 1.I BIAS + I S1 Where I BIAS < I S2
The Biased differential protection function uses the two sets of three phase
current measurement inputs (IA, IB, IC, IA2, IB2, IC2), connected to measure
the phase current at the neutral end and terminals of the machine, as shown in
Figure 3. The bias and differential currents are calculated by the relay
software, providing a phase segregated differential protection function, and
may be viewed in the “ MEASUREMENTS” columns in the relay menu.
I A2
I B2
I C2
MiCOM
IA P343
IB
IC
Figure 3: Relay connections for biased differential protection
2.3.2 Setting guidelines for biased differential protection

To select biased differential protection the “ GenDiff Function” cell should be set
to ‘Biased’.
The differential current setting, “ Gen Diff Is1” , should be set to a low setting to
protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated
current of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. “ Gen Diff Is2” ,
the threshold above which the second bias setting is applied, should be set to
120% of the machine rated current.
The initial bias slope setting, “ Gen Diff k1” , should be set to 0% to provide
optimum sensitivity for internal faults. The second bias slope may typically be
set to 150% to provide adequate stability for external faults.
These settings may be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to
supply the protection.
Page 11 of 103
2.3.3 High impedance differential protection

The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential
scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 4.
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone
Zm
R CT1 R
CT2
R L1 If R L3
R st
Vs
R L2 R
R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

Vs = KI f (R CT2 + 2R L ) where K = 1.5
Stabilising resistor,R st , limits spill current to Is (relay setting)

R st = Vs
- RR
Is
Where R R = relay burden
Figure 4: Principle of high impedance differential protection
If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary

current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If the
magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the
maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault
current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing
the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through
the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input
alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The
value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 3. An
additional non linear resistor, Metrosil, may be required to limit the peak
secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions.
To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault the CTs
used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4Vs.
Page 12 of 103
The high impedance differential protection function uses the IA2, IB2, IC2
current inputs connected to measure the differential current in each phase, as
shown in Figure 5.
RST = Stabilising resistor

NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)
MiCOM
P343
NLR
I A2
I B2
I C2
Figure 5: Relay connections for high impedance differential protection
2.3.4 Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection

To select high impedance differential protection the “ GenDiff Function” cell
should be set to ‘High Impedance’.
The differential current setting, “ Gen Diff Is1” , should be set to a low setting to
protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated
current of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. This setting may
need to be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the
protection. A check should be made to ensure that the primary operating
current of the element is less than the minimum fault current for which the
protection should operate.
The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer
ratio, the relay operating current (Gen Diff Is1), the number of current
transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of
each current transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can
be expressed in three ways:
i. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to
achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay
operating current.
1  I op 
Ie < x  - Gen diff Is1
n  CT ratio 
Page 13 of 103
ii. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific

primary operating current with a given current transformer magnetising
current.
 I op 
Gen diff Is1 <  - nI e 
 CT ratio 
iii. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular

relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetising
current.
I op = (CT ratio) x (Gen diff I s1 + nI e )
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting (Gen Diff Is1) must be selected for
the high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of
the stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where
the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the
relay current setting (Gen Diff Is1).
VS
R ST =
Gen diff Is1
Note: The above formula assumes negligible relay burden

USE OF “ METROSIL” NON-LINEAR RESISTORS
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current
transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level
of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally
able to withstand 3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage
that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during
an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage
and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if
current transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a
function of maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer
ratio, the current transformer secondary winding resistance , the current
transformer lead resistance to the common point, the relay lead resistance and
the stabilising resistor value.
VP = 2 2 VK (Vf - VK )
Vf = I ’f (R CT + 2R L + R ST )
where
Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur.
Page 14 of 103
I‘f = maximum internal secondary fault current.

RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance.
RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
RST = relay stabilising resistor.
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils
should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the
purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from
the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their
operating characteristics follow the expression:
V = CI 0.25
where V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” )
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” )
I = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ) .
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would
be approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated
as follows;
4
 Vs(rms) x 2 
I (rms) = 0.52 

 C 
where Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“ metrosil” ) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
i. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ) current
should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA
rms. for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA rms. for 5A
current transformers.
ii. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” )
should limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second.
At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the
fault voltage to 1500V rms., so higher fault voltages may have to be
tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required,
depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the
following restrictions:-
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than
30mA rms
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit
should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
Page 15 of 103
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown
in the following table:
Relay Voltage Nominal Characteristic Recommended Metrosil Type

Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless
otherwise specified by the customer
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following
requirements:-
100mA rms (the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below
their type description.
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay
settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence
higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and
single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary Recommended METROSIL Type

internal
fault current Relay Voltage Setting
Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223

50A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C =670/800 C = 740/870*
35mA rms 40mA rms 50mA rms 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196

100A C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C =570/670 C =620/740*

150A C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C = 570/670** C =620/740***
100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rm
Note: *2400V peak **2200V peak ***2600V peak

In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control for detailed applications.
Page 16 of 103
Notes:
1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be
applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole
units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated for
each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil
type", followed by the single pole type reference.
2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can
be supplied if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the
Applications department at ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control.
2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection
A two stage non directional overcurrent element is provided in the P340 relays.
This element can be used to provide time delayed back-up protection for the
system and high set protection providing fast operation for machine faults.
The first stage has a time delayed characteristic that can be set as either
Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The second stage
has a definite time delay, which can be set to zero to produce instantaneous
operation. Each stage can be selectively enabled or disabled.
This element uses the IA, IB, and IC relay inputs and can be fed from CTs at the
terminal or neutral end of the generator, depending on the application.
Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL
(DDB142, DDB143. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and
trip of each phase of each stage of protection, (Starts:- DDB276-283, Trips:-
DDB239-246). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed
in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size

Min Max
GROUP 1: OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function Disabled Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse,
IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse,
UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse,
IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
US Inverse, US ST Inverse
I>1 Current Set 1 x In A 0.08 x In A 4 x In A 0.01 x In A
I>1 Time Delay 1s 0 100 s 0.01 s
I>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
I>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 15 1
I>1 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse N/A
I>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
I>2 Function DT Disabled or DT N/A
Page 17 of 103
I>2 Current Set 0.08 x In A 0.08 x In A 10 x In A 0.01 x In A

I>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01s
For inverse time delayed characteristics, the following options are available.
Note that all IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t = T x { [ K / ((I/Is)α - 1)) ] + L}
t = operation time
K = constant
I = measured current
Is = current threshold setting
α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier setting
Curve description Standard K constant α constant L constant

Standard Inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very Inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely Inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long Time Inverse UK 120 1 0
Moderately Inverse IEEE 0.0103 0.02 0.0228
Very Inverse IEEE 3.922 2 0.0982
Extremely Inverse IEEE 5.64 2 0.0243
Inverse US 5.95 2 0.18
Short Time Inverse US 0.005 0.04 0
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with
regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the
operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for
the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on
the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10
times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged
such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the “ I>1 Time Dial” cell is not visible
and vice versa for the TMS setting.
The overcurrent protection function operates from the phase currents measured
by the IA, IB and IC measurement inputs on the relay.
2.4.1 Application of timer hold facility
The first stage of overcurrent protection in the P340 relays are provided with a
timer hold facility.
Setting the hold timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage
will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting.
Page 18 of 103
Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the
protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain
applications, for example when grading with electromechanical overcurrent
relays which have inherent reset time delays. It will also enable the element to
become sensitive to a pole slipping condition where the element will cyclically
operate as the machine slips successive poles.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen for, this time delay is
set via the “ I>1 tRESET” setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to
either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “ I>1 Reset Char” . If
definite time (‘DT’) is selected the “ I>1 tRESET” cell may be used to set the time
delay. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the
inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected
for “ I>1 Function” .
Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault
clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. When the
reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly
reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the
timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby
reducing fault clearance time.
2.4.2 Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection
The first stage of overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“ I>1 Function” to any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if
“ I>1 Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The first stage can provide back-up protection for faults on the generator and
the system. As such it should be co-ordinated with downstream protection to
provide discrimination for system faults, setting the current threshold
(“ I>1 Current Set” ), and the time delay.
(“ I>1 TMS” - for IEC curves; “ I>1 Time Dial” - for US/IEEE curves; “ I>1 Time
Delay” for definite time) accordingly.
In order to provide back-up protection for the generator and system, the
element must be supplied from CTs connected in the generator tails. If terminal
end CTs are used, the element will provide protection for the system only, unless
the generator is connected in parallel to a second source of supply.
The second stage of overcurrent protection can be enabled by setting
“ I>2 Function” to DT, providing a definite time operating characteristic. The
second stage is disabled if “ I>2 Function” is set to ‘Disabled’. Where terminal
CTs are used, the second stage can be set as an instantaneous overcurrent
protection, providing protection against internal faults on the machine. The
current setting of the second stage, “ I>2 Current Set” , could be set to 120% of
the maximum fault rating of the generator, typically 8 x full load current. The
operating time, “ I>2 Time Delay” , should be set to 0s to give instantaneous
operation. The stage will therefore be stable for external faults where the fault
current from the generator will be below the stage current setting. For faults
within the machine, the fault current will be supplied from the system and will
be above the second stage current setting, resulting in fast clearance of the
internal fault.
Page 19 of 103
2.5 System back-up protection

A generator is a source of electrical power and will supply system faults until
they are cleared by system protection. Back-up protection must be applied at
the generator so that faults are cleared in the event of downstream protection/
circuit breakers failing to operate.
The fault current supplied by a generator will vary during a fault condition as
indicated by the generator decrement curve, shown in Figure 6. The fault
current response is determined by the action of the automatic voltage regulator
on the machine. With some generators, fault current initiates an AVR ‘boost’
circuit which maintains the fault current at a relatively high level. If the voltage
regulator is set to manual control or no boost circuit exists , the fault current can
be severely restricted, leading to slow operation of back-up protection for
system faults. In the worst case the fault current will fall below the full load
rating of the machine, so simple overcurrent protection with a setting above full
load current, cannot operate.
Full load
current
0.25s 0.5s t
Figure 6: Typical generator fault current decrement curve
System back-up protection must operate quickly during a fault and must not
operate for load conditions. To achieve these two objectives, two methods of
system back-up protection are commonly used;
1- Voltage dependant overcurrent protection. The presence of a fault is
detected by an under voltage element and the relay setting is adjusted
accordingly. Voltage dependant overcurrent protection can be
operated in a ‘voltage controlled’ or ‘voltage restrained’ mode.
2- Under impedance protection. This element is set to monitor the system
impedance at the terminals of the machine. If the impedance measured
falls below a set threshold then the element will operate.
Customer preference will determine the mode of operation. However, subtle
application benefits can be claimed for one form of protection over the other in
certain circumstances.
Page 20 of 103
A single protection element, that can be configured as either voltage

dependant overcurrent or under impedance, is provided in the P340 relay for
system back-up protection. The operation of the element is described in the
following sections.
The function operates from the phase currents measured by the IA, IB and IC
measurement inputs on the relay.
The System Backup protection element can be blocked by energising the
relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB141). DDB signals are also available to
indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB327,
DDB328.DDB329, DDB330, Trips:- DDB187, DDB188, DDB189, DDB190). The
state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the
“ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.

Min Max
GROUP 1: SYSTEM BACK-UP
Back-up Function Voltage Controlled Disabled, Voltage Controlled,
Voltage Restrained,
Under Impedance
Vector Rotation None None, Delta-Star N/A
V Dep OC Char IEC S Inverse DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V
Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT
Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V
Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US
Inverse, US ST Inverse
V Dep OC I> Set 1 x In A 0.08 x In A 4 x In A 0.01 x In A
V Dep OC T Dial 7 0.5 15 1
V Dep OC Reset DT DT or Inverse N/A
V Dep OC Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
V Dep OC TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
V Dep OC tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
V Dep OC V>1Set 80 V 20 V 120 V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
320 V 80 V 480 V 4V
(Vn=400/440V)) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
V Dep OC V>2Set 60V 20V 120V 1V

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
240V 80V 480V 4V
(Vn=400/440V)) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
Page 21 of 103
V Dep OC k Set 0.25 0.25 1 0.05s

Z< Setting 70/In Ω 2Ω 120/In Ω 0.5/InΩ
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
120/In Ω 2Ω 480/In Ω 2/In Ω
(Vn=400/440V)) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
Z< Time Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

Z< tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
For inverse time delayed characteristics refer to the phase overcurrent elements,
Section 2.4.
2.5.1 Voltage dependant overcurrent protection
The generator terminal voltage will drop during fault conditions and so a
voltage measuring element can be used to control the current setting of this
element. On detection of a fault the current setting is reduced by a factor K.
This ensures faults are cleared in spite of the presence of the generator
decrement characteristic. Line voltages are used to control each phase
overcurrent element as shown below.
Phase Current Control Voltage

Ia Vab
Ib Vbc
Ic Vca
A single stage, non directional overcurrent element is provided. The element

has a time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse Definite
Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The element can be selectively
enabled or disabled and can be blocked via a relay input so that the element
can be integrated into a blocked overcurrent protection scheme.
The element can be fed from CTs at the terminal or neutral end of the
generator.
If voltage dependant overcurrent operation is selected, the element can be set
in one of two modes, voltage controlled overcurrent or voltage restrained
overcurrent.
2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
In this mode of operation, the under voltage detector is used to produce a step
change in the relay current setting (from “ V Dep OC I> Set” to
“ V Dep OC k Set” x “ V Dep OC I> Set” ), when voltage falls below the voltage
setting, “ V Dep OC V>1 Set” . Under load conditions the relay can have a high
current setting greater than full load current. Under fault conditions the relay is
switched to a more sensitive setting leading to fast fault clearance. The
operating characteristic of the current setting when voltage controlled mode is
selected is shown in Figure 7.
Page 22 of 103
Current
setting
I> Set
KI> Set
V<1 Set Measured voltage
Figure 7: Modification of current pickup level for voltage controlled overcurrent

protection
Where the generator is directly connected to a busbar, voltage controlled

overcurrent protection may be preferred.
2.5.1.2 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“ Backup Function” to ‘Voltage controlled’. The protection is disabled if “ Backup
Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The current setting, “ V Dep OC I> Set” , should be set to have a primary
operating value in excess of the maximum generator load current.
The current setting multiplying factor, “ V Dep OC k Set” , governs the protection
function setting under low voltage conditions. This should be set to give a
primary operating current less than 50% of the minimum steady-state fault
current for a multi-phase fault at the remote end of a feeder, with the generator
being the only source. This ensures the element will provide adequate back-up
protection for an uncleared fault on that feeder.
The voltage-controlled protection fault characteristic should co-ordinate with
outgoing feeder protection for a feeder fault under minimum plant conditions.
The operating characteristic, “ V Dep OC Char” and the time delay.(“ V Dep
OC TMS” - for IEC curves; “ V Dep OC T Dial” - for US/IEEE curves; “ V Dep
OC Delay” for definite time) should be selected accordingly.
Where parallel sources are present, a remote feeder fault may not result in a
sufficient voltage reduction to enable the fault characteristic. For such
applications a time undervoltage element can be used to clear the fault (see
Section 2.6). Alternatively, negative sequence thermal protection could be used
(see Section 2.11).
The voltage setting for switching between load and fault characteristics,
“ V Dep OC V<1 Set” , should be greater than the terminal voltage for a fault
where back-up protection is required. On a solidly earthed system the element
can be made insensitive to earth faults by ensuring that the voltage setting is
below 57%Vn (minimum phase to phase voltage for a single phase to earth
Page 23 of 103
fault). A typical setting would be 30%Vn. A voltage setting higher than 57%Vn
will allow the relay operating characteristic to change for both phase and earth
faults.
More accurate settings may be determined with reference to the following
equations.
The minimum fault current for a remote-end multi-phase fault on a feeder can
be determined as follows. This calculation is based on no-load excitation being
applied and no field-forcing or AVR action during the fault.
Three-phase fault:
En
If =
(nRf ) + (X s + nX f )2
2
3En
Phase to phase fault: If =
(2nRf ) + (X s + X 2 + 2nX f )2
2
Where:
If = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end
fault
En = No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator
Xs = Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator
X2 = Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator
Rf = Feeder positive phase sequence resistance
Xf = Feeder positive phase sequence reactance
n = Number of parallel generators
The steady-state voltage seen by the relay under external fault conditions can
be deduced as follows:
Three-phase fault: Vφ -φ =
(
En 3 (nR f ) + (nX f )
2 2
)
(nR f )2 + (X s + nX f )2
Phase-phase fault: Vφ -φ =
(
2En 3 (nR f ) + (nX f )
2 2
)
(2nRf )2 + (X s + X 2 + 2nX f )2
The current setting multiplier, “ V Dep OC k Set” , must be set such that
“ V Dep OC k Set” x “ V Dep OC I Set” is less than If as calculated above. The
voltage setting, “ V Dep OC V<1 Set” , must be greater than V .
φ -φ
The voltage controlled overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold
facility, as described in Section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other
than zero delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is
set via the “ V Dep OC tRESET” setting.
Page 24 of 103

either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “ V Dep OC Reset Char” .
If definite time (‘DT’) is selected the “ V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set
the time delay, as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset
time will follow the inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time
dial setting, selected for “ V Dep OC Function” .
2.5.1.3 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
In voltage restrained mode the effective operating current of the protection
element is continuously variable as the applied voltage varies between two
voltage thresholds, “ V Dep OC V<1 Set” and “ V Dep OC V<2 Set” , as shown
in Figure 8. In this mode, it is quite difficult to determine the behaviour of the
protection function during a fault. This protection mode is, however, considered
to be better suited to applications where the generator is connected to the
system via a generator transformer. With indirect connection of the generator, a
solid phase-phase fault on the local busbar will result in only a partial
phase-phase voltage collapse at the generator terminals.
Current
setting
I> Set
KI> Set
V<2 Set V<1 Set Measured voltage
Figure 8: Modification of current pickup level for voltage restrained overcurrent

protection
To improve the sensitivity of the voltage-restrained overcurrent protection
function, for HV phase-phase faults fed via a Yd1 or Yd11 step-up transformer,
the appropriate voltage signal transformation facility should be switched in as
part of the P340 settings. In the past, such correction of voltage signals has
been addressed by adopting phase-neutral voltage measurement or the use of
a star/delta interposing VT. Such an approach cannot be adopted with P340
since the relay voltage inputs are common to other protection and measurement
functions that would be undesirably affected by voltage signal correction.
The P340 voltage-restrained current setting is related to measured voltage as
follows:
Page 25 of 103
For V > Vs1: Current setting (Is) = I>

For Vs2 < V < Vs1: Current setting (Is) = K.I > +  I > - K.
I  V - Vs2 
 
 I >  Vs1 - Vs2 
For V < Vs2: Current setting (Is) = K.I>
Where: I> = “ V Dep OC I> Set”
Is = Current setting at voltage V
V = Voltage applied to relay element
Vs1 = “ V Dep OC V<1 Set”
Vs2 = “ V Dep OC V<2 Set”
2.5.1.4 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“ Backup Function” to ‘Voltage Restrained’. The protection is disabled if
“ Backup Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The performance criteria on which the settings of the voltage-restrained
overcurrent protection function should be based are similar to those discussed
for the voltage controlled mode in Section 2.5.1.2. Co-ordination with
downstream protection should be ensured when the relay is on its most sensitive
settings i.e. for voltages less than the “ V Dep OC V<2 Set” setting. Current
threshold, characteristic and time delay can be selected as described for the
Voltage Controlled function described in Section 2.5.1.2
The voltage restrained overcurrent function should be able to respond to a
remote-end fault on an outgoing feeder. Where the generator is connected via
a step up transformer, zero sequence quantities will not be present at the relay
location for HV side earth faults. Therefore, it would be normal to use negative
sequence thermal protection for back-up protection in this case. The negative
phase sequence thermal element will also provide back-up protection for phase
to phase faults. For this reason, consideration will only be given to the detection
of a remote-end three-phase feeder fault, with the protected machine as the
only source.
For a remote-end, three-phase fault, it is possible to calculate the level of current
and voltage at the relay location. It should be ensured that the relay current
setting, “ V Dep OC k Set” x “ V Dep OC I Set” , should be set to less than 50%
of the fault current. It must also be ensured that the voltage threshold,
“ V Dep OC V<2 Set” , is set to a value above the voltage measured at the
relay. There would be no need for further reduction in the current setting for
closer faults, which would yield higher currents and lower voltages. Further
reduction in the current setting for closer faults may make co-ordination with
local feeder overcurrent protection more difficult (if this is not already a
problem).
The steady-state primary current and voltage magnitudes seen for a feeder
remote-end three-phase fault are given as follows:
En
If =
(nRf ) + (X s + X t + nX f )2
2
Vφ -φ =
(
En 3 (nR f ) + (X t + nX f )
2 2
)
(nR f ) + (X s + X t + nX f )
2 2
Page 26 of 103
Where:
If = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end
fault
En = No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator
Xs = Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator
X2 = Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator
Xt = Step-up transformer reactance
Rf = Feeder positive phase sequence resistance
Xf = Feeder positive phase sequence reactance
n = Number of parallel generators
All above quantities are to referred to the generator side of the transformer.
The upper voltage threshold setting, “ V Dep OC V<1 Set” , should be set below
the minimum corrected phase-phase voltage level for a close-up HV earth fault,
to ensure that the element is insensitive to the fault. In the case of HV solid
earthing, this voltage would be a minimum of 57% of the nominal operating
voltage.
The voltage restrained overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold
facility, as described in Section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other
than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is
set via the “ V Dep OC tRESET” setting.
either definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “ V Dep OC Reset Char” .
If definite time (‘DT’) is selected the “ V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set
the time delay, as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset
time will follow the inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time
dial setting, selected for “ V Dep OC Function” .
2.5.2 Under impedance protection
When the element is set to under impedance mode the element operates with a
time delayed three phase non directional impedance characteristic, shown in
Figure 9.
Page 27 of 103
Trip
Figure 9: Under impedance element tripping characteristic
Impedance for each phase is calculated as shown:

Vab Vbc Vca
Zab = Zbc = Zab =
Ia Ib Ic
With rated voltage applied, the element operates as a definite time overcurrent
relay. It operates at a lower current as the voltage reduces, hence the element
is similar to a voltage restrained overcurrent element, operating with a definite
time characteristic.
Under impedance protection is an alternative to voltage dependent overcurrent
protection and is often preferred due to its ease of setting. It may however be
difficult to provide co-ordination with downstream inverse time overcurrent
protections.
2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function
Under impedance protection can be selected by setting “ Backup Function” to
‘Under Impedance’. The protection is disabled if “ Backup Function” is set to
‘Disabled’.
The impedance setting of the relay, “ Z< Setting” , should be set to 70% of the
maximum load impedance. This gives an adequate margin for short time
overloads, voltage variation etc., whilst giving adequate back-up protection for
generator, generator transformer and busbar faults.
The time delay, “ Z< Time Delay” should allow co-ordination with downstream
overcurrent devices.
The under impedance protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as
described in section 2.2.1. Setting the hold timer, “ Z< tRESET” , to a value other
than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timer for this period.
Page 28 of 103
2.6 Undervoltage protection function (27)

Under voltage protection is not a commonly specified requirement for generator
protection schemes. However, under voltage elements are sometimes used as
interlocking elements for other types of protection, such as field failure. In the
P340, this type of interlocking can be arranged via the relay scheme logic.
Undervoltage protection may also be used for back-up protection where it may
be difficult to provide adequate sensitivity with voltage dependant /
underimpedance / negative phase sequence elements.
For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged
undervoltage condition could arise for a number of reasons. One reason would
be failure of automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment. Where an auxiliary
transformer is used to supply generator ancillary equipment, such as boiler-feed
pumps, air-blowers, lubrication pumps etc., a prolonged undervoltage
condition could adversely affect the performance of the machine. If such a
situation is envisaged, the application of time-delayed undervoltage protection
might be a consideration.
A two stage undervoltage element is provided. The element can be set to
operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an
independent time delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation.
Selectable, fixed Logic is included within the relay to allow the operation of the
element to be inhibited during periods when the machine is isolated from the
external system.
Each stage of undervoltage protection can be blocked by energising the
relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB158, DDB159). DDB signals are also
available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB258-
265, Trips:- DDB215-222). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to
be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in
the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table

Min Max
GROUP 1: VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Undervoltage Sub Heading
V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V< Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V<1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
V<1 Voltage Set 80 V 10 V 120 V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
320 V 40 V 480 V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
V<1 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

V<1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
Page 29 of 103
V<1 Poledead Inh Enabled Disabled Enabled

V<2 Function DT Disabled DT
V<2 Voltage Set 80 V 10 V 120 V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
320 V 40 V 480 V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
V<2 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

V<1 Poledead Inh Enabled Disabled, Enabled
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (1 - M)
Where;
K = Time Multiplier Setting (V>1 TMS)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set)
2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation) ,
‘DT’ (for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the
“ V<1 Function” cell. Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in
the “ V<2 Status” cell. The time delay.(“ V<1 TMS” - for IDMT curve;
“ V<1 Time Delay” , “ V<2 Time Delay” - for definite time) should be adjusted
accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-
neutral voltage as selected by “ V< Measur’t Mode” . Single or three phase
operation can be selected in “ V<1 Operate Mode” . When ‘Any Phase’ is
selected, the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when
‘Three Phase’ is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages
are below the setting.
If the undervoltage protection function is to be used for back-up protection, the
voltage setting ,” V<1 Voltage Set” , should be set above the steady-state
phase-phase voltage seen by the relay for a three-phase fault at the remote end
of any feeder connected to the generator bus. Allowances should be made for
the fault current contribution of parallel generators, which will tend to keep the
generator voltage up. If the element is set to operate from phase to phase
voltages operation for earth faults can be minimised, ie. set “ V< Measur’t
Mode” to ‘Phase-Phase’. To allow detection of any phase to phase fault,
“ V< Operate Mode” should be set to ‘Any-Phase’. Equations for determining
the phase-phase voltage seen by the relay under such circumstances are given
in Section 2.5.1.2.
The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set
“ V<1 Function” to ‘DT’. The time delay, “ V<1 Time Delay” , should be set to co-
ordinate with downstream protections and the System Back-up protection of the
relay, if enabled. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent
Page 30 of 103
unwanted operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips.
These may occur during clearance of faults further into the power system or by
starting of local machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess
of 3s-5s.
The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual
voltage conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the
machine is being operated with the AVR selected to manual control.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (eg. requirements of
G59 in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the
element. The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the
system with voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority.
To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the
generator “ poledead” logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by
selecting “ V Poledead Inh” to ‘Enabled’. This will ensure that when a Poledead
condition is detected (ie. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or
CB Open, as determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the undervoltage
element will be inhibited.
2.7 Overvoltage protection
A generator terminal overvoltage condition could arise when the generator is
running but not connected to a power system, or where a generator is
providing power to an islanded power system. Such an over voltage could arise
in the event of a fault with automatic voltage regulating equipment or if the
voltage regulator is set for manual control and an operator error is made.
Overvoltage protection should be set to prevent possible damage to generator
insulation, prolonged overfluxing of the generating plant, or damage to power
system loads.
When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an
overvoltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level
of power system capacitive charging current. An overvoltage condition might
also be possible following a system separation, where a generator might
experience full-load rejection whilst still being connected to part of the original
power system. The automatic voltage regulating equipment and machine
governor should quickly respond to correct the overvoltage condition in these
cases. However, over voltage protection is advisable to cater for a possible
failure of the voltage regulator or for the regulator having been set to manual
control. In the case of Hydro generators, the response time of the speed
governing equipment can be so slow that transient over speeding up to 200%
of nominal speed could occur. Even with voltage regulator action, such over
speeding can result in a transient over voltage as high as 150%. Such a high
voltage could result in rapid insulation damage.
A two stage overvoltage element is provided. The element can be set to
operate from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an
independent time delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation.
Each stage of overvoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant
DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB160, DDB161). DDB signals are also available to
indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts:- DDB266-273, Trips:-
Page 31 of 103
Min Max
GROUP 1: VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Overvoltage Sub Heading
V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V> Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
V>1 Voltage Set 150 V 60 V 185 V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
600 V 240 V 740 V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
V>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

V>1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
V>2 Status DT Disabled DT
V>2 Voltage Set 130 V 60 V 185 V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
520 V 240 V 740 V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
V>2 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

formula:
t = K / (M - 1)
Where;
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“ V>1 TMS” )
M = Measured Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage (“ V>1 Voltage Set” )
2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation),
‘DT’ (for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the
“ V>1 Function” cell. Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is
Enabled/Disabled in the “ V>2 Status” cell. The time delay.(“ V>1 TMS” - for
IDMT curve; “ V>1 Time Delay” , “ V>2 Time Delay” - for definite time) should be
selected accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or Phase-
Neutral voltage as selected by “ V> Measur’t Mode” cell. Single or three phase
operation can be selected in “ V> Operate Mode” cell. When ‘Any Phase’ is
Page 32 of 103
selected the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when
‘Three Phase’ is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages
are above the setting.
Generators can typically withstand a 5% overvoltage condition continuously.
The withstand times for higher overvoltages should be declared by the
generator manufacturer.
To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the
phase-phase voltages, to achieve this “ V>1 Measur’t Mode” can be set to
‘Phase-Phase’ with “ V>1 Operating Mode” set to ‘Three-Phase’. The
overvoltage threshold, “ V>1 Voltage Set” , should typically be set to 100%-120%
of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay. The time delay,
“ V>1 Time Delay” , should be set to prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed
overvoltage protection function due to transient over voltages that do not pose
a risk to the generating plant; eg. following load rejection where correct AVR/
Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be applied would be 1s-3s, with a
longer delay being applied for lower voltage threshold settings.
The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage
protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, “ V>2 Voltage Set” ,
would be 130-150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay,
depending on plant manufacturers’ advice. For instantaneous operation, the
time delay, “ V>2 Time Delay” , should be set to 0s.
system with voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority.
If phase to neutral operation is selected, care must be taken to ensure that the
element will grade with downstream protections during earth faults, where the
phase-neutral voltage can rise significantly.
2.8 Underfrequency protection
Underfrequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system
load exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of
generators. Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes
split, with load left connected to a set of ‘islanded’ generators that is in excess
of their capacity. Such events could be compensated for by automatic load
shedding. In this case, underfrequency operation would be a transient
condition. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, the generators
should be provided with back-up underfrequency protection.
An underfrequency condition, at nominal voltage, may result in some over
fluxing of a generator and its associated electrical plant. However, the more
critical considerations would be in relation to blade stresses being incurred with
high-speed turbine generators; especially steam-driven sets. When not running
at nominal frequency, abnormal blade resonance’s can be set up which, if
prolonged, could lead to turbine disc component fractures. Such effects can be
accumulative and so operation at frequencies away from nominal should be
limited as much as possible, to avoid the need for early plant inspections/
overhaul. Underfrequency running is difficult to contend with, since there is little
action that can be taken at the generating station in the event of overloading,
Page 33 of 103
other than to shut the generator down.

Four independent definite time-delayed stages of underfrequency protection are
offered. Two additional overfrequency stages can also be reconfigured as
underfrequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic.
As well as being able to initiate generator tripping, the underfrequency
protection can also be arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where
appropriate. Selectable fixed scheme logic is provided to allow each stage of
underfrequency protection to be disabled when the outgoing CB is open, to
prevent unnecessary load tripping.
Each stage of underfrequency protection can also be blocked by energising the
relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB162-DDB165). DDB signals are also
available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:-

Min Max
GROUP 1: FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Under frequency Sub Heading
F<1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F<1 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<3 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<4 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<4 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F< Function Link 1111 Bit 0 - Enable Block F<1 during Poledead
Bit 1 - Enable Block F<2 during Poledead
2.8.1 Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection

Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as ‘Enabled’ or
‘Disabled’, within the “ F<x Status” cells. The frequency pickup setting,
“ F<x Setting” , and time delays, “ F<x Time Delay” , for each stage should be
Page 34 of 103
The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for
the generating set are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency
condition should be continuously sustainable.
For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under
common control/ownership, the P340 under frequency protection function could
be used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/
load shedding can be provided. The final stage of underfrequency protection
should be used to trip the generator.
Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the underfrequency
protection should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will
not occur in the event of successful load shedding following a system overload.
Two stages of under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in
Figure 10, to co-ordinate with multi-stage system load-shedding.
Frequency
fn
A
F1<
F2<
Turbine prohibited area
t2 t1 Time
A System frequency response with

minimum load shed for recovery
B System frequency response with

under shedding of load
C Optimum underfrequency
protection characteristic
Figure 10: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load

shedding
To prevent operation of any underfrequency stage during normal shutdown of
the generator “ poledead” logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for
each stage by setting the relevant bit in “ F< Function Link” . For example if
“ F< Function Link” is set to 0111, Stage 1, 2 and 3 of underfrequency
protection will be blocked when the generator CB is open. Selective blocking of
Page 35 of 103
the frequency protection stages in this way will allow a single stage of
protection to be enabled during synchronisation or offline running to prevent
unsynchronised overfluxing of the machine. When the machine is synchronised,
and the CB closed, all stages of frequency protection will be enabled providing
a multi stage load shed scheme if desired.
system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority. Where the local external load exceeds the generator capacity,
underfrequency protection may be used to provide ‘Loss of Mains’ protection.
2.9 Overfrequency protection function
Overfrequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input
to the alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The
most common occurrence of overfrequency is after substantial loss of load.
When a rise in running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to
reduce the mechanical input power, so that normal running speed is quickly
regained. Overfrequency protection may be required as a back-up protection
function to cater for governor or throttle control failure following loss of load or
during unsynchronised running.
Moderate overfrequency operation of a generator is not as potentially
threatening to the generator and other electrical plant as underfrequency
running. Action can be taken at the generating plant to correct the situation
without necessarily shutting down the generator.
Severe overfrequency operation of a high-speed generating set could result in
plant damage, as described in Section 2.12, as a result of the high centrifugal
forces that would be imposed on rotating components.
Two independent time-delayed stages of overfrequency protection are provided.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal
via the PSL, (DDB166,DDB167). DDB signals are also available to indicate start
and trip of each stage, (Starts:- DDB301-304, Trips:- DDB231-234). The state of
the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells
of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Min Max
GROUP 1: FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Overfrequency Sub Heading
F>1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F>2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
Page 36 of 103
2.9.1 Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection

Each stage of overfrequency protection may be selected as Enabled or
Disabled, within the “ F>x Status” cells. The frequency pickup setting,
“ F>x Setting” , and time delays, “ F>x Time Delay” , for each stage should be
The P340 overfrequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal,
transient overfrequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator
manufacturer should declare the expected transient overfrequency behaviour,
which should comply with international governor response standards. A typical
overfrequency setting would be 10% above nominal.
system with frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply
authority.
2.10 Field failure protection function (40)
Complete loss of excitation may arise as a result of accidental tripping of the
excitation system, an open circuit or short circuit occurring in the excitation DC
circuit, flashover of any slip rings or failure of the excitation power source. The
field failure protection of the P340 consists of two elements, an impedance
element with two time delayed stages and a power factor alarm element,
illustrated below in Figure 11. The elements operate from A phase current and
A phase voltage signals measured by the IA and VA inputs on the relay.
X
Normal machine operating impedance
R
- Xa2 - Xa1
Alarm angle
Xb2 Xb1
Figure 11: Field failure protection characteristics

When the excitation of a synchronous generator fails, its internal e.m.f. will
decay. This results in the active power output of the machine falling and in an
increasing level of reactive power being drawn from the power system. As the
active power output falls, the mechanical drive can accelerate the machine so
Page 37 of 103
that it will gently pole-slip and run at a super synchronous speed. This results in
slip frequency currents being induced in the rotor body, damper windings and
in the field windings. The slip-induced, low-frequency rotor currents will result in
a rotor flux being produced. The machine would then be excited from the
power system and hence be operating as an induction generator. The ability to
reach such a stabilised state will be dependent on the machine’s effective
speed-torque characteristic when operating as an induction generator, and also
on the power system being able to supply the required reactive power without
severe voltage depression.
Stable operation as an induction generator might be achieved at low slip (0.1-
0.2% above synchronous speed), particularly in the case of salient pole
machines. The machine may be able to maintain an active power output
(perhaps 20-30% of rating) whilst drawing reactive power from the power
system (generating at a highly leading power factor). This condition could
probably be sustained for many minutes without rotor damage being incurred
and may not be detectable by traditional field failure impedance characteristic
elements. The P340, however, offers a power factor alarm element in the field
failure protection which can operate when the generator is running in this
condition.
Cylindrical rotor machines have a much lower output capability when operating
as an induction generator under excitation failure conditions. They are more
likely to be pushed over the peak torque level of their induction generator
speed-torque characteristic. If the peak induction generator torque level is
exceeded, a machine can stabilise at a much higher level of slip (perhaps 5%
above synchronous speed). When this happens, the machine will draw a very
high reactive current from the power system and a stator winding current as
high as 2.0 p.u. may be reached. The slip-frequency rotor currents could lead
to rotor core or winding damage if the condition is sustained.
Operation as an induction generator under field failure conditions relies upon
the ability of the rest of the system being able to supply the required reactive
power to the machine. If the system cannot supply enough reactive power the
system voltage will drop and the system may become unstable. This could occur
if a large generator running at high power suffers a loss of field when
connected to a relatively weak system. To ensure fast tripping under this
condition one of the impedance elements can be used with a short time delay.
This can trip the machine quickly to preserve system stability. This element
should have a small diameter to prevent tripping under power swinging
conditions. The second impedance element, set with a larger diameter, can
provide detection of field failure under lightly loaded conditions. This second
element should be time delayed to prevent operation during power swing
conditions.
The Field Failure protection impedance elements are also provided with an
adjustable delay on reset (delayed drop off) timer . This time delay can be set
to avoid delayed tripping that may arise as a result of cyclic operation of the
impedance measuring element, during the period of pole-slipping following loss
of excitation. Some care would need to be exercised in setting this timer, since
it could make the Field Failure protection function more likely to give an
unwanted trip in the case of stable power swinging. The impedance element
trip time delay should therefore be increased when setting the reset time delay.
Page 38 of 103
The delay on reset timer might also be set to allow the field failure protection
function to be used for detecting pole slipping of the generator when excitation
is not fully lost; eg. following time-delayed clearance of a nearby power system
fault. This subject is discussed in more detail in Section 2.21.
DDB signals are available to indicate tripping of each stage (DDB184,
DDB185). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the field failure elements are shown in the following table:
Min Max
Group 1 Feild failure
FFail Alm Status Disabled Disabled Enabled
FFail Alm Angle 15° 15° 75° 1°
FFail Alm Delays 5s 0s 100s 0.1s
FFail1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
FFail1 -Xa1 20/In Ω 0Ω 40/In Ω 0.5/In Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80/In Ω 0Ω 160/In Ω 2/In Ω
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
FFail1 Xb1 20/In Ω 0Ω 40/In Ω 0.5/In Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80/In Ω 0Ω 160/In Ω 2/In Ω
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
FFail1 TimeDelay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s

FFail1 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
FFail2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
FFail2 -Xa 20/In Ω 0Ω 40/In Ω 0.5/In Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80/In Ω 0Ω 160/In Ω 2/In Ω
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
FFail2 Xb2 20/In Ω 0Ω 40/In Ω 0.5/In Ω

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
80/In Ω 0Ω 160/In Ω 2/In Ω
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
FFail2 TimeDelay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s

FFail2 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
2.10.1 Setting guidelines for field failure protection

Each stage of field failure protection may be selected as ‘Enabled’ or
‘Disabled’, within the “ FFail1 Status” , “ FFail2 Status” cells. The power factor
alarm element may be selected as Enabled or Disabled within the “ FFail Alm
Status” cell.
Page 39 of 103
2.10.1.1Impedance element 1
To quickly detect a loss-of field condition, the diameter of the field failure
impedance characteristic (“ FFail1 Xb1” ) should be set as large as possible,
without conflicting with the impedance that might be seen under normal stable
conditions or during stable power swing conditions.
Where a generator is operated with a rotor angle of less than 90° and never at
a leading power factor, it is recommended that the diameter of the impedance
characteristic, “ FFail1 Xb1” , is set equal to the generator direct-axis
synchronous reactance. The characteristic offset, “ FFail1 -Xa1” should be set
equal to half the direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd’) in secondary ohms.
“ FFail1 Xb1” = Xd
“ FFail1 -Xa1” = 0.5 Xd’
Where:
Xd = Generator direct-axis synchronous reactance in ohms
Xd’ = Generator direct-axis transient reactance in ohms
Where high-speed voltage regulation equipment is used it may be possible to
operate generators at rotor angles up to 120°. In this case, the impedance
characteristic diameter, “ FFail1 Xb1” , should be set to 50% of the direct-axis
synchronous reactance (0.5Xd) and the offset, “ FFail1 -Xa1” , should be set to
75% of the direct axis transient reactance (0.75Xd’).
“ FFail1 Xb1” = 0.5 Xd
“ FFail1 -Xa1” = 0.75 Xd’
The field failure protection time delay, “ FFail1 Time Delay” , should be set to
minimise the risk of operation of the protection function during stable power
swings following system disturbances or synchronisation. However, it should be
ensured that the time delay is not so long that stator winding or rotor thermal
damage will occur. A typical stator winding should be able to withstand a
current of 2.0 p.u. for the order of 15s. It may also take some time for the
impedance seen at the generator terminals to enter the characteristic of the
protection. A time delay less than 10s would typically be applied. The minimum
permissible delay, to avoid problems of false tripping due to stable power
swings with the above impedance settings, would be of the order of 0.5s.
The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, “ FFail1 DO Timer” , would typically
be set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s
can be used to provide an integrating function for instances when the
impedance may cyclically enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow
detection of pole slipping conditions, for more information see Section 2.21.
When settings other than 0s are used the protection pick-up time delay,
“ FFail1 Time Delay” , should be increased to prevent mal-operation during
stable power swing conditions.
Page 40 of 103
2.10.1.2 Impedance element 2

The second impedance element can be set to give fast operation when the field
fails under high load conditions. The diameter of the characteristic, “ FFail2
Xb2” , should be set to 1 p.u. The characteristic offset, “ FFail2 -Xa2” , should be
set equal to half the direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd’).
kV 2
FFail1 Xb2 =
MVA
’
FFail2 Xb2 = 0.5Xd
This setting will detect a field failure condition from full load to about 30% load.
The time delay, “ FFail2 Time Delay” , can be set to instantaneous, ie. 0s.
The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, “ FFail2 DO Timer” , would typically
be set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s
can be used to provide an integrating function for instances when the
impedance may cyclically enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow
detection of pole slipping conditions, for more information see Section 2.21.
When settings other than 0s are used the protection pick-up time delay,
“ FFail2 Time Delay” , should be increased to prevent maloperation during stable
power swing conditions.
2.10.1.3 Power factor element
Salient pole machines can run continuously as induction generators generating
significant power and operation under these conditions may not be detectable
by an impedance characteristic. The power factor alarm can be used to signal
to the operator that excitation has failed under these conditions.
The angle setting, “ FFail Alm Angle” , should be set to greater than any angle
that the machine could be operated at in normal running. A typical setting
would be 15°, equivalent to a power factor of 0.96 leading. The power factor
element time delay, “ FFail Alm Delay” , should be set longer than the
impedance element time delay setting (“ FFail1 Time Delay” ) to prevent
operation of the alarm element under transient conditions such as power
swinging.
2.11 Negative phase sequence thermal protection
The Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection provided by the P340 is a true
thermal replica with a definite-time alarm stage. The relay derives the negative
phase sequence operating quantity from the following equation:
I a + a2 I b + aI c , where a = 1.0/120ο
I2 =
3
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence

current components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase
loading, non-linear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.),
uncleared or repetitive asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping
and reclosing on transmission systems, broken overhead line conductors and
asymmetric failures of switching devices. Any negative phase sequence
component of stator current will set up a reverse-rotating component of stator
Page 41 of 103
flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous speed. Such a flux component
will induce double frequency eddy currents in the rotor, which can cause
overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper windings etc.
Where a machine has a high continuous negative phase sequence current
withstand level (I2 amp), as in the case of typical salient-pole machines, it
would not be essential to enable the NPS protection function. The NPS
protection function can, however, offer a better method of responding to an
uncleared asymmetric fault remote from the generator bus. As mentioned in
Section 2.5.1.2, it may be difficult to set the voltage dependant overcurrent
protection function to detect a remote fault and co-ordinate with feeder backup
protection for a close-up 3-phase fault.
Many traditional forms of generator NPS thermal protection relays have been
designed with an extremely inverse (I22t) operating time characteristic. Where
the operating time of the characteristic is dependent solely on the instantaneous
magnitude of negative phase sequence current present. This characteristic
would be set to match the claimed generator thermal capacity. This is
satisfactory when considering the effects of high values of negative phase
sequence current.
The basic expression of t = K/I2cmr does not cater for the effects of heat
dissipation or for low standing levels of negative phase sequence current. The
latter resulting in an increase in rotor temperature which remains within the
machines design limits. An existing, tolerable, level of negative phase sequence
current (I2<I2cmr), has the effect of reducing the time to reach the critical
temperature level, if the negative phase sequence current level should increase
beyond I2cmr. The P340 NPS thermal replica is designed to overcome these
problems by modelling the effects of low standing levels of negative phase
sequence currents.
The P340 negative phase sequence element offers a true thermal characteristic
according to the following formula:
( I 2 > 2 k Setting)   ( I 2 > 2 Current set)  2 

t=- 
Loge 1 -   
( I 2 > 2 Current set) 2   
 
I2
Note: All current terms are in per-unit, based on the relay rated current, In.
When the protected generator sees a reduction in negative phase sequence
current, metallic rotor components will decrease in temperature. The relay is
provided with a separate cooling time constant setting (Kreset), used when
there is a reduction in I2.
The negative sequence protection element will respond to system phase to earth
and phase to phase faults. Therefore, the element must be set to grade with
downstream earth and phase fault protections. To aid grading with
downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for the operating
characteristic can be set. The definite minimum time setting should be set to
provide an adequate margin between the operation of the negative phase
sequence thermal protection function and external protection. The co-ordination
time margin used should be in accordance with the usual practice adopted by
the customer for backup protection co-ordination.
For levels of negative phase sequence current that are only slightly in excess of
the thermal element pick up setting , there will be a noticeable deviation
Page 42 of 103
between the P340 negative phase sequence thermal protection current-time

characteristic and that of the simple I22t characteristic. For this reason, a
maximum negative phase sequence protection trip time setting is provided.
This maximum time setting also limits the tripping time of the negative phase
sequence protection for levels of unbalance where there may be uncertainty
about the machine’s thermal withstand.
A time delayed negative sequence overcurrent alarm stage is provided to give
the operator early warning of an unbalanced condition that may lead to
generator tripping. This can allow corrective action to be taken to reduce the
unbalance in the load.
The Negative Sequence element uses the current measured at the IA, IB, IC
inputs on the relay.
Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the “ Rotor Thermal” cell in the
“ MEASUREMENTS 3” column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting ‘Yes’
in the “ Reset Thermal” cell in “ Measurements 3” . Alternatively the thermal state
can be reset by energising DDB177 via the relay PSL.
A DDB signal are also available to indicate tripping of element (DDB186). A
further DDB ‘Alarm’ signal is generated from the NPS thermal alarm stage
(DDB128).The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be viewed in the
“ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the negative phase sequence thermal element are shown in
the following table:

Min Max
GROUP 1: NPS THERMAL
I2>1 Alarm Enabled Disabled, Enabled
I2>1 Current Set 0.05 In A 0.03 In A 0.5 In A 0.01 In A
I2>1 Time Delay 20 s 2s 60 s 0.1 s
I2>2 Trip Enabled Disabled, Enabled
I2>2 Current set 0.1 In A 0.05 In A 0.5 In A 0.01 In A
I2>2 k Setting 15 2 40 0.1
I2>2 kRESET 15 2 40 0.1
I2>2 tMAX 1000 s 500 s 2000 s 10 s
I2>2 tMIN 0.25 s 0.25 s 40 s 0.25 s
2.11.1 Setting guidelines for negative phase sequence thermal protection

The alarm and trip stages of the negative phase sequence thermal protection
may be selected as ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’, within the “ I2>1 Alarm” and
“ I2>2 Trip” cells respectively.
Synchronous machines will be able to withstand a certain level of negative
phase sequence stator current continuously. All synchronous machines will be
assigned a continuous maximum negative phase sequence current (I2cmr per-
Page 43 of 103
unit) rating by the manufacturer. For various categories of generator, minimum

negative phase sequence current withstand levels have been specified by
international standards, such as IEC34-1 and ANSI C50.13-1977 [1]. The
IEC34-1 figures are given in Table 1.
Generator type Maximum I2/In for Maximum (I2/In)2t for
continuous operation operation under fault
conditions, Kg
Salient pole:
Indirectly cooled 0.08 20
Directly cooled
(inner cooled) stator
and/or field 0.05 15
Cylindrical rotor
synchronous:
Indirectly cooled rotor
Air cooled 0.1 15
Hydrogen cooled 0.1 10
Directly cooled
(inner cooled) rotor
≤ 350MVA 0.08 8
> 350 ≤ 900MVA * **
> 900 ≤ 1250MVA * 5
> 1250 ≤ 1600MVA 0.05 5
* For these generators, the value of I2/In is calculated as follows:
I2 S - 350
= 0.08 - n
In 3 x 10 4
** For these generators, the value of (I2/In)2t is calculated as follows:

2
 I2 
  t = 8 - 0.00545(Sn - 350)
 In 
where S is the rated power in MVA
n
Table 1 IEC34-1 Minimum negative sequence current withstand levels.

To obtain correct thermal protection, the relay thermal current setting,
“ I2>2 Current Set” , and thermal capacity setting, “ I2>2 k Setting” , should be
set as follows:
 I flc 
I 2 > 2 Current set = I 2 cmr ×   × In
 I 
 p 
2
 I flc 
I 2 > 2 k Setting = K g ×  
I 
 p 
Page 44 of 103
Where:
I 2cmr = Generator per unit I2 maximum withstand.
Kg = Generator thermal capacity constant (s), see Table 1 for guidance.
Iflc = Generator primary full-load current (A).
Ip = CT primary current rating (A).
In = Relay rated current (A).
Unless otherwise specified, the cooling time constant, “ I2>2 kRESET” , setting
should be set equal to the main time constant setting, “ I2>2 k Setting” . A
machine manufacturer may be able to advise a specific cooling time constant
for the protected generator.
The current threshold of the alarm stage, “ I2>1 Current Set” , should be set
below the thermal trip setting, “ I2>2 Current Set” , to ensure that the alarm
operates before tripping occurs. The alarm stage time setting, “ I2>1 Time
Delay” , must be chosen to prevent operation during system fault clearance and
to ensure that unwanted alarms are not generated during normal running. A
typical setting for this time delay would be 20s.
To aid grading with downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for
the operating characteristic can be set, “ I2>2 tMIN” . This definite minimum
time setting should be set to provide an adequate margin between the
operation of the negative phase sequence thermal protection function and
external protection. The co-ordination time margin used should be in
accordance with the usual practice adopted by the customer for back-up
protection co-ordination.
A maximum operating time for the negative phase sequence thermal
characteristic may be set, “ I2>2 tMAX” . This definite time setting can be used
to ensure that the thermal rating of the machine is never exceeded.
2.12 Reverse power/over power/low forward power
The power protection elements of the P340 relay calculate the three phase
active power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the
IA, IB, IC inputs on the relay.
P = VaIa cosΦ a + VbIb cosΦ b + VcIc cosΦ c

Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently
selected as either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled,
operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power
elements may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be
inhibited when the protected machines CB is open, this will prevent mal-
operation and nuisance flagging of any stage selected to operate as low
forward power.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage
(Starts: DDB274, DDB275, Trips: DDB237, 238). The state of the DDB signals
can be programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the
Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table:
Page 45 of 103

Min Max
GROUP 1: POWER
Power1 Function Reverse Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
-P>1 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 40 x In W 0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 x In W 16 x In W 160 x In W 2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P<1 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 40 x In W 0.5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P>1 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 300 x In W 0.5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Power1 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s

Time Delay
Power1 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
DO Timer
P1 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Power2 Function Low Forward Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
-P>2 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 40 x In W 0.5 x In W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P<2 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 40 x In W 0.5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
P>2 Setting 5 x In W 4 x In W 300 x In W 0.5 x In W

(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Power2 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s

Time Delay
Power2 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
DO Timer
P2 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled
2.12.1 Low forward power protection function

When the CB connecting the generator to the system is tripped, the electrical
load on the generator is cut. This could lead to generator over-speed if the
mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. Large turbo-alternators, with
Page 46 of 103
low-inertia rotor designs, do not have a high over speed tolerance. Trapped
steam in the turbine, downstream of a valve that has just closed, can rapidly
lead to over speed. To reduce the risk of over speed damage to such sets, it is
sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the generator breaker and
the excitation system with a low forward power check. This ensures that the
generator set circuit breaker is opened only when the output power is
sufficiently low that over speeding is unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping,
until prime mover input power has been removed, may be deemed acceptable
for ‘non-urgent’ protection trips; eg. stator earth fault protection for a high
impedance earthed generator. For ‘urgent’ trips, eg. stator current differential
protection the low forward power interlock should not be used. With the low
probability of ‘urgent’ trips, the risk of over speed and possible consequences
must be accepted.
The low forward power protection can be arranged to interlock ‘non-urgent’
protection tripping using the relay scheme logic. It can also be arranged to
provide a contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via ‘poledead’
logic.
2.12.1.1Low forward power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a low forward
power stage by selecting the “ Power1 Function” or “ Power2 Function” cell to
‘Low Forward’.
When required, the threshold setting of the low forward power protection
function, “ P<1 Setting” or “ P<2 Setting” , should be less than 50% of the power
level that could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical
loading. The generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the
protected machine.
The time delay associated with the low forward power protection function,
“ Power1 TimeDelay” or “ Power2 TimeDelay” , could be set to zero. However,
some delay is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not
given in the event of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/
throttle closure. A typical time delay for this reason is 2s.
The delay on reset timer, “ Power1 DO Timer” or “ Power2 DO Timer” , would
normally be set to zero when selected to operate low forward power elements.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection
element can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via ‘poledead’ logic.
This is controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells,
“ P1 Poledead Inh” or “ P2 Poledead Inh” , to ‘Enabled’.
2.12.2 Reverse power protection function
A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system in normal
operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is connected in
parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to ‘motor’. This
reversal of power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the
reverse power element.
The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the
power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
Page 47 of 103
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various
types of generating plant are given in the following table.
Prime Mover Motoring Power Possible Damage

(Percentage rating)
Diesel Engine 5% - 25% Risk of fire or explosion from
unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness.
Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage.
Gas Turbine 10% - 15% With some gear-driven sets,

(Split-shaft) damage may arise due to reverse
torque on gear teeth.
>50%
(Single-shaft)
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power
compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit
power loss or damage.
Hydraulic Turbines 0.2 - >2% Blade and runner cavitation
(Blades out of water) may occur with a long period of
motoring
>2.0%
(Blades in water)
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow
detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive.
Automatic disconnection is recommended for unattended operation.
Steam Turbines 0.5% - 3% Thermal stress damage may be
(Condensing sets) inflicted on low-pressure turbine
3% - 6% blades when steam flow is not
(Non-condensing available to dissipate windage
sets) losses.
Damage may occur rapidly with non-condensing sets or when vacuum is lost
with condensing sets. Reverse power protection may be used as a secondary
method of detection and might only be used to raise an alarm.
Table showing motoring power and possible damage for various types of prime
mover.
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover
failure may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To
prevent cyclic initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure
to trip, an adjustable reset time delay is provided. This delay would need to be
set longer than the period for which the reverse power could fall below the
power setting (“ P<1 Setting” ). This setting needs to be taken into account when
setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that a delay on reset in
excess of half the period of any system power swings could result in operation
of the reverse power protection during swings.
Page 48 of 103
Reverse power protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the
generator set circuit breaker for ‘non-urgent’ tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1.
Reverse power interlocks are preferred over low forward power interlocks by
some utilities.
2.12.2.1Reverse power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a reverse power
stage by selecting the “ Power1 Function” or “ Power2 Function” cell to ‘Reverse’.
The power threshold setting of the reverse power protection, “ -P>1 Setting” or “ -
P>2 Setting” , should be less than 50% of the motoring power, typical values for
the level of reverse power for generators are given in previous table.
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false
trips or alarms being given during power system disturbances or following
synchronisation. A time delay setting, “ Power1 TimeDelay” or “ Power2
TimeDelay” of 5s should be applied typically.
normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the
reset time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to
ensure that false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power
swinging event.
An additional more sensitive reverse power relay may be required in the case
of large steam turbines of hydro machines, where the minimum setting
provided by the P340 relay is too high. Such dedicated relays can be fed from
measurement class CTs providing more accurate determination of low levels of
power. An external relay can be integrated into the overall protection/
monitoring/recording scheme via the P340 programmable scheme logic.
2.12.3 Over power protection
The overpower protection can be used as overload indication, as a back-up
protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set
above the maximum power rating of the machine.
2.12.3.1Over power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an over power
stage by selecting the “ Power1 Function” or “ Power2 Function” cell to ‘Over’.
The power threshold setting of the over power protection, “ P>1 Setting” or
“ P2 Setting” , should be set greater than the machine full load rated power.
A time delay setting, “ Power1 TimeDelay” or “ Power2 TimeDelay” should be
applied.
normally be set to zero.
2.13 Stator earth fault protection function
Low voltage generators will be solidly earthed, however to limit the damage
that can be caused due to earth faults, it is common for HV generators to be
connected to earth via an impedance. This impedance may be fitted on the
secondary side of a distribution transformer earthing arrangement. The
earthing impedance is generally chosen to limit earth fault current to full load
current or less.
Page 49 of 103
There is a limit on the percentage of winding that can be protected by a stator

earth fault element. For earth faults close to the generator neutral, the driving
voltage will be low, and hence the value of fault current will be severely
reduced. In practice, approximately 95% of the stator winding can be
protected. For faults in the last 5% of the winding, the earth fault current is so
low that it cannot be detected by this type of earth fault protection. In most
applications this limitation is accepted as the chances of an earth fault
occurring in the last 5% of the winding, where the voltage to earth is low, is
small.
The percentage of winding covered by the earth fault protection can be
calculated as shown below, with reference to Figure 12.
x
If
Is
R If = xV/R
x min = Is R/V
% covered = (1 - x min ) x 100%
Figure 12: Effective coverage of stator earth fault protection

A two stage non-directional earth fault element is provided. The first stage has
an inverse time or definite time delay characteristic and can incorporate a reset
time delay to improve detection of intermittent faults. The second stage has a
definite time characteristic which can be set to 0s to provide instantaneous
operation.
Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage
of protection may be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. The
second stage may also be used to provide instantaneous protection where
grading with system protection is not required. See setting guidelines for more
details.
via the PSL (DDB146, DDB147). This allows the earth fault protection to be
integrated into busbar protection schemes as shown in Section 2.24, or can be
used to improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also
available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of protection, (Starts:-
DDB292, DDB293, Trips:- DDB204, DDB205). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the
Page 50 of 103
The Stator Earth Fault element is powered from the IN CT input on the relay. This
input should be supplied from a CT fitted into the generator earth path so that
the element provides earth fault protection for the generator and back-up
protection for system faults. Alternatively, the element may be supplied from a
CT fitted on the secondary side of a distribution transformer earthing system.
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following
table:

Min Max
Group 1 Earth fault
IN>1 Function Disabled Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,
IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M
Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
IN>1 Current 0.1 x In A 0.02 x In A 4 x In A 0.01 x In A
IN>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
IN>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
IN>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 15 1
IN>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse N/A
IN>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
IN>2 Function DT Disabled, DT N/A
IN>2 Current Set 0.45 x In A 0.02 x In A 10 x In A 0.01 x In A
IN>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the
Overcurrent Protection, Section 2.4.
2.13.1 Setting guidelines for stator earth fault potection
The first stage of earth fault protection can be selected by setting “ IN>1
Function” to any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if
“ IN>1 Function” is set to ‘Disabled’. The second stage of earth fault protection
can be selected by setting “ IN>2 Function” to ‘Enabled’. The second stage is
disabled if “ IN>2 Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
For a directly connected machine the stator earth fault protection must co-
ordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. The first stage current
setting, “ IN>1 Current” , should typically be set to less than 33% of the machine
earth fault contribution or full load current, whichever is lower. The time delay
characteristic of the element (selected via “ IN>1 Function” and
“ IN>1 Time Delay” , “ IN>1 TMS” or “ IN>1 Time Dial” ) should be set to time
grade with any downstream earth fault protection. Where the element is
required to protect 95% of the generator winding a current setting of 5% of the
limited earth fault current should be used.
Page 51 of 103
Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage

may be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. In such a case the
second stage current setting, “ IN>2 Current” , could be set to approximately
150% of the limited earth fault current and the time delay, “ IN>2 Time Delay” ,
would be set to 0s, to provide instantaneous operation.
For a machine connected to the system via a step-up transformer there is no
need to grade the stator earth fault element with system earth fault protections.
In this case the first stage should be set to 5% of the limited earth fault current
to provide protection for 95% of the machine winding. The time delay
characteristic of the stage should grade with VT fuses for VT earth faults. A
transient generator earth fault current may also occur for a HV earth fault due
to transformer inter-winding capacitance. Correct grading under these
conditions can be provided by using a definite time delay of between 0.5-3s.
Experience has shown that it is possible to apply an instantaneous stator earth
fault element on a indirectly connected machine if a current setting of ≥10% of
the limited earth fault current is used. Therefore the second stage can be set to
give this instantaneous protection.
2.14 Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
function
On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three
phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three
balanced vectors at 120° to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs
on the primary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is
produced. This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of
a voltage transformer having a “ broken delta” secondary connection. Hence, a
residual voltage measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault protection on
such a system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with
respect to earth which is commonly referred to as “ neutral voltage
displacement” or NVD.
Alternatively, if the system is impedance or distribution transformer earthed, the
neutral displacement voltage can be measured directly in the earth path via a
single phase VT. This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault
protection irrespective of whether the generator is earthed or not, and
irrespective of the form of earthing and earth fault current level. For faults close
to the generator neutral the resulting residual voltage will be small. Therefore,
as with stator earth fault protection, only 95% of the stator winding can be
reliably protected.
It should be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied to a
directly connected generator, such a voltage will be generated for an earth
fault occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD
protection must co-ordinate with other earth fault protections.
The neutral voltage displacement protection function of the P340 relay consists
of two stages with adjustable time delays.
Two stages are included for the element to account for applications which
require both alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is
common in such a case for the system to have been designed to withstand the
associated healthy phase overvoltages for a number of hours following an earth
fault. In such applications, an alarm is generated soon after the condition is
detected, which serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the system.
Page 52 of 103
This gives time for system operators to locate and isolate the fault. The second
stage of the protection can issue a trip signal if the fault condition persists.
A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be
used to measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta
connected VT or the voltage measured on the secondary side of a distribution
transformer earth connection, as shown in Figure 13. Alternatively, the residual
voltage may be derived internally from the three phase to neutral voltage
measurements. Where derived measurement is used the 3 phase to neutral
voltage must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs. These
types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit
the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star
point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux
and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when residual voltage is required
to be derived from the phase to neutral voltage measurement.
The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the
sensitive directional earth fault protection function.
1
3
Va
Vb
Vc
Vn
1 Derived from phase neutral voltages MiCOM
2 Measured from earth impedance P343
3 Measured from broken delta VT
Figure 13: Alternative relay connections for residual overvoltage/NVD protection

via the PSL (DDB156, DDB157), this can be used to improve grading with
downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and
trip of each stage of protection, (Starts:- DDB256, DDB257, Trips:- DDB213,
DDB214). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following
table:
Page 53 of 103

Min Max
GROUP 1 RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input Measured Measured, Derived
VN>1 Function DT 0.02 x In A 4 x In A 0.01 x In A
VN>1 Voltage
Set 5V 1V 50V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
20 V 4V 200V 5V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
VN>1 Time
Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
VN>1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
VN>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
VN>2 Status DT Disabled or DT
VN>2 Voltage
Set 5V 1V 50V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/
120V)
20 V 4V 200V 5V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/
440V)
VN>2 Time
Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
formula:
t = K x 40 / (1 - M)
Where;
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“ VN>1 TMS” )
M =Measured Residual Voltage / Relay Setting Voltage (“ VN>1 Voltage Set” )
2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement

protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (inverse time operating
characteristic), ‘DT’ (definite time operating characteristic) or ‘Disabled’, within
the “ VN>1 Function” cell. Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic
and is Enabled/Disabled in the “ VN>2 Status” cell. The time
delay.(“ VN>1 TMS” - for IDMT curve; “ V>1 Time Delay” , “ V>2 Time Delay” - for
definite time) should be selected in accordance with normal relay co-ordination
Page 54 of 103
procedures to ensure correct discrimination for system faults.

The residual overvoltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage
measured at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the
phase-neutral voltage inputs as selected by “ VN Input” .
For a directly connected machine the neutral voltage displacement protection
must co-ordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. To ensure co-
ordination the voltage setting of the neutral voltage displacement protection
function should be set higher than the effective setting of current operated earth
fault protection in the same earth fault zone. The effective voltage setting of a
current operated earth fault protection may be established from the following
equations:
Veff = (Ipoc x Ze) / (1/3 x V1/V2) for an open delta VT
Veff = (Ipoc x Ze) / (V1/V2) for a single phase star point VT
where:
Veff = effective voltage setting of current operated protection
Ipoc = primary operating current of current operated protection
Ze = earthing impedance
V1
/V2 = VT turns ratio
It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any
standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting
for residual overvoltage protection is 5V.
The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or
very high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an
appreciable time under an earth fault condition.
Where the generator is connected to the system via a transformer, co-ordination
with system earth fault protections is not required. In these applications the
NVD voltage setting should typically be set to 5% of rated voltage. This will
provide protection for 95% of the stator winding.
2.15 Sensitive earth fault protection function
If a generator is earthed through a high impedance, or is subject to high
ground fault resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited.
Consequently, the applied earth fault protection requires both an appropriate
characteristic and a suitably sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A
separate sensitive earth fault element is provided within the P340 relay for this
purpose, this has a dedicated CT input allowing very low current setting
thresholds to be used.
An alternative use for the sensitive earth fault input is on a multiple earthed
system where it is advantageous to apply a directional earth fault relay at the
machine terminals. The directional relay, operating for current flowing into the
machine, will be stable for external faults but can operate quickly for generator
faults when fault current is fed from the system.
Where several machines are connected in parallel, it is common for only one
machine to be earthed at any time. This prevents the flow of third harmonic
currents which could overheat the machine. This may be the only earth
connection for this part of the system. Non directional earth fault protection
could be applied at the terminals of the unearthed machines in such cases
Page 55 of 103
since an unearthed generator cannot source earth fault current. However, as

any of the machines can be earthed, it is prudent to apply directional
protection at the terminals of all the machines. There is also a risk that transient
spill current can cause operation of a non directional, terminal fed, earth fault
relay for an external phase fault, hence directional elements have an added
degree of security. When applied in this way the directional earth fault
elements will operate for faults on the unearthed machines but not the earthed
machine. Therefore, additional stator earth fault or residual overvoltage/NVD
protection should be used to protect the earthed machine. Such a scheme will
provide stable, fast, earth fault protection for all machines, no matter which
generator is earthed.
A single stage definite time sensitive earth fault protection element is provided
in the P340 relay, this element can be set to operate with a directional
characteristic when required. When directional earth Fault protection is
required the operating current should be derived from either a core balanced
CT or the residual connection of 3 phase CTs at the terminals of the machine.
Direction of the earth fault current for this element is determined with reference
to the polarising signal, the residual voltage. The polarising signal is taken from
the residual overvoltage/NVD protection input or derived from the 3 phase-
neutral voltage inputs on the relay.
A polarising voltage threshold is also provided. The element cannot operate
unless voltage exceeds this threshold. This helps to restrain the element during
phase/phase faults when transient CT saturation produces spill current in the
residual connection of the phase CTs. No residual voltage will be present
during such non earth fault conditions hence the DEF element cannot operate.
The element will therefore be enabled only during genuine earth fault conditions
when significant residual voltage will be present. To prevent the element from
mal-operating due to VT fuse failure the element can be blocked from the VT
supervision logic.
Where Petersen Coil earthing is used, users may wish to use Wattmetric
Directional Earth Fault protection. Settings to enable the element to operate as
a wattmetric element are also provided.
The Sensitive Earth Fault protection can be blocked by energising the relevant
DDB signal via the PSL (DDB150). This allows the protection to be integrated
into busbar protection schemes as shown in Section 2.24, or can be used to
improve grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to
indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:- DDB296, Trips:- DDB209).
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor
Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Sensitive Earth Fault element are shown in the following
table:
Page 56 of 103

Min Max
Group 1 SEF/REF Protection
SEF/REF
Options SEF SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF,
Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt
ISEF>1
Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,
IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M
Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
ISEF>1
Direction Non-Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd,
Directional Rev
ISEF>1 Current 0.05 In A 0.002 In A 0.1 In A 0.00025 In A
ISEF>1 Delay 1s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
ISEF> Func Link 1 Bit 0 - Block ISEF> from VTS
ISEF
DIRECTIONAL Sub Heading
ISEF> Char
Angle 90° -95° 95° 1°
ISEF> VNpol
Input Measured Measured, Derived
ISEF> Vnpol
Set 5V 0.5 V 22 V 0.5 V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
20 V 2V 88 V 2V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
WATTMETRIC
SEF Sub Heading
PN> Setting 9 x In W 0W 20 x In W 0.05 x In W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
36 x In W 80 x In W 0.2 x In W
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the
Overcurrent Protection, Section 2.4.
2.15.1 Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection
The operating function of the sensitive earth fault protection can be selected by
setting “ SEF/REF Options” cell. The SEF protection is selected by setting
“ ISEF>1 Function” to ‘Enabled’. To provide sensitive earth fault or sensitive
directional earth fault protection the “ SEF/REF Options” cell should be set to
‘SEF’. For wattmetric earth fault protection “ SEF/REF Options” cell should be set
Page 57 of 103
to ‘Wattmetric’. The other options for “ SEF/REF Options” relate to restricted

earth fault protection, for more details see Section 2.16.
The directionality of the element is selected in the “ ISEF> Direction” setting. If
“ ISEF> Direction” is set to ‘Directional Fwd’ the element will operate with a
directional characteristic and will operate when current flows in the forward
direction, ie. when current flows into the machine with the relay connected as
shown in the standard relay connection diagram. If “ ISEF> Direction” is set to
‘Directional Rev’ the element will operate with a directional characteristic and
will operate when current flows in the opposite direction, ie. current flow out of
the machine into the system. If “ ISEF> Direction” is set to ‘Non-Directional’ the
element will operate as a simple overcurrent element. If either of the directional
options are chosen additional cells to select the characteristic angle of the
directional characteristic and polarising voltage threshold will become visible.
The operating current threshold of the Sensitive Earth Fault protection function,
“ ISEF>1 Current” , should be set to give a primary operating current down to
5% or less of the minimum earth fault current contribution to a generator
terminal fault.
The directional element characteristic angle setting, “ ISEF> Char Angle” , should
be set to match as closely as possible the angle of zero sequence source
impedance behind the relaying point. If this impedance is dominated by an
earthing resistor, for example, the angle setting would be set to 0°. On
insulated or very high impedance earthed systems the earth fault current
measured by a SDEF element is predominantly capacitive hence the RCA
should be set to -90°.
The polarising voltage threshold setting, “ ISEF> VNpol Set” , should be chosen
to give a sensitivity equivalent to that of the operating current threshold. This
current level can be translated into a residual voltage as described for the
residual overvoltage protection in Section 2.14.
When the element is set as a non directional element the definite time delay
setting “ ISEF>1 Delay” should be set to co-ordinate with downstream devices
that may operate for external earth faults. For an indirectly connected generator
the SEF element should co-ordinate with the measurement VT fuses, to prevent
operation for VT faults. For directional applications when the element is fed
from the residual connection of the phase CTs a short time delay is desirable to
ensure stability for external earth faults or phase/phase faults. A time delay of
0.5s will be sufficient to provide stability in the majority of applications. Where
a dedicated core balance CT is used for directional applications an
instantaneous setting may be used.
2.16 Restricted earth fault protection
Earth faults occurring on a machine winding or terminal may be of limited
magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the
percentage of stator winding that is involved in the fault. As stated in Section
2.13, it is common to apply stator earth fault protection fed from a single CT in
the machine earth connection - this can provide time delayed protection for a
stator winding or terminal fault. On larger machines, typically >2MW, where
phase CTs can be fitted to both neutral end and terminal ends of the stator
winding, phase differential protection may be fitted. For small machines,
however, only one set of phase CTs may be available making phase differential
protection impractical. For smaller generators earth fault differential protection
Page 58 of 103
can be applied to provide instantaneous tripping for any stator or terminal

earth fault. In application the operating zone of earth fault differential
protection is restricted to faults within the boundaries of the CTs supplying the
relay, hence this type of element is referred to as restricted earth fault
protection.
When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must
be employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, thus
ensuring that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding /
connections. Two methods are commonly used; percentage bias or high
impedance. The biasing technique operates by measuring the level of through
current flowing and altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high
impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is of sufficiently high
impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external fault
conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the relay.
The REF protection in the P340 relays may be configured to operate as either a
high impedance differential or a low impedance biased differential element.
The following sections describe the application of the relay in each mode.
Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT
input as the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
A DDB signals are also available to indicate the tripping of the REF protection,
(DDB208). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
The REF settings can be found in the ‘SEF/REF PROT’N’ column and are shown
below:-

Min Max
GROUP 1: SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF/REF Options SEF SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF,
Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt
REF PROTECTION Sub Heading
IREF> k1 0% 0 20% 1%
IREF> k2 0% 0 150% 1%
IREF> Is1 0.2 In A 0.05 In A 1 In A 0.01 In A
IREF> Is2 1 In A 0.1 In A 1.5 In A 0.01 In A
IREF> Is 0.2 In A 0.05 In A 1 In A 0.01 In A
Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in Section 6

2.16.1 Low impedance biased differential REF protection
In a biased differential relay, the through current is measured and used to
increase the setting of the differential element. For heavy through faults, one CT
in the scheme can be expected to become more saturated than the other and
hence differential current can be produced. However, biasing will increase the
relay setting such that the resulting differential current is insufficient to cause
Page 59 of 103
operation of the relay.

Figures 14 and 15 show the appropriate relay connections and operating
characteristic for the P340 relay applied for biased REF protection,
respectively:-
Ia
Ib
Ic
In
MiCOM
P343
Figure 14: Relay connections for biased REF protection
I DIFF
Operate
k2
Restrain
IS1 k1
IS2 I BIAS
Figure 15: Biased REF protection operating characteristic

As can be seen in Figure 14, the three line CTs are connected to the three
phase CTs in the normal manner. The neutral CT is then connected to the stator
earth fault CT input. These currents are then used internally to derive both a
bias and a differential current quantity for use by the low impedance biased
Page 60 of 103
differential REF protection.

The advantage of this method of connection is that the line and neutral CTs are
not differentially connected and so the neutral CT can also be used to drive the
stator earth fault protection. Also, no external equipment such as stabilising
resistors or metrosils are required, unlike the case with high impedance
protection.
The formula used by the relay to calculate the required bias quantity is
therefore as follows:-
Ibias = {(Highest of Ia, Ib or Ic) + (Ineutral x Scaling Factor)} / 2
The reason for the scaling factor included on the neutral current is explained by
referring to Figure 16:-
Phase CT ratio 1000/1

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral CT ratio
200/1
IA
IB
IC
IN
MiCOM
IBIAS = (highest of IA , IB , IC ) + ( I N x scaling factor) P343
2
Neutral CT ratio 200

Where the scaling factor = = = 0.2
Phase CT ratio 1000
IDIFF = IA + IB + IC + (scaling factor x I N )
Figure 16: Neutral scaling bor biased REF protection

Page 61 of 103
Where it is required that the neutral CT also drives the stator earth fault
protection element, it may be a requirement that the neutral CT has a lower
ratio than the line CTs in order to provide better earth fault sensitivity. The relay
automatically scales the level of neutral current used in the bias calculation by a
factor equal to the ratio of the neutral to line CT primary ratings to compensate
for any mismatch.
2.16.1.1Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection
To select low impedance biased REF protection “ SEF/REF Option” should be
selected to ‘Lo Z REF’. If REF protection is required to operate alongside
sensitive earth fault protection, “ SEF/REF Option” should be selected to
‘Lo Z REF + SEF’ or ‘Lo Z REF + Wattmet’ (if Wattmetric earth fault protection is
required).
As can be seen from Figure 15, two bias settings are provided in the REF
characteristic of the P340. The “ IREF> k1” level of bias is applied up to through
currents of “ IREF> Is2” , which is normally set to the rated current of the
machine. “ IREF> k1” should normally be set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity
for internal faults. However, if any differential spill current is present under
normal conditions due to CT mismatch, then “ IREF> k1” may be increased
accordingly, to compensate.
“ IREF> k2” bias is applied for through currents above “ IREF> Is2” and may
typically be set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults.
The neutral current scaling factor which automatically compensates for
differences between neutral and phase CT ratios relies upon the relay having
been programmed with the correct CT ratios. It must therefore be ensured that
these CT ratios are entered into the relay, in the “ CT RATIOS” menu, in order
for the scheme to operate correctly.
The differential current setting “ IREF> Is1” should typically be set to 5% of the
limited earth fault current level.
2.16.2 High impedance restricted earth fault protection
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential
scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 17.
If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary
current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT
magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the
maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault
current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing
the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through
the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input
alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The
value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 17.
Page 62 of 103
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone
Zm
R CT1 R CT2
R L1 If R L3
R st
Vs
R L2 R
R L4
Voltage across relay circuit

Vs = KI f (R CT + 2R L ) - where K = 0.7
Stabilising resistor,R st , limits spill current to Is (relay setting)

R st = Vs
- RR
Is
Where R R = relay burden
Figure 17: Principle of high impedance differential protection

The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in
Figure 18:
RST = Stabilising resistor

NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)
NLR RST
MiCOM
P343
I SEF
Figure 18: Relay connections for high impedance REF protection

Page 63 of 103
As can be seen from Figure 18, the high impedance protection uses an
external differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF
input is then connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in
series.
2.16.2.1Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection
From the “ Sens E/F Options” cell, ‘Hi Z REF’ must be selected to enable High
Impedance REF protection. The only setting cell then visible is “ IREF> Is” , which
may be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would
typically be set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the
minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and
60% of rated current for a solidly earthed system.
The primary operating current (Iop) will be a function of the current transformer
ratio, the relay operating current (“ IREF> Is” ), the number of current
transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of
each current transformer (Ie) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can
be expressed in three ways:
i. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to
achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay
operating current.
1  I op 
Ie < x  - IREF > Is1
n  CT ratio 
ii. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary
operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.
 I op 
IREF > Is1<  - nI e 
 CT ratio 
iii. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular

relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetising
current.
I op = (CT ratio ) x (IREF > Is1+ nI e )
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting “ IREF> Is” must be selected for the
high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the
stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the
setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (VS) and the relay
current setting “ IREF> Is” .
VS
R ST =
IREF > Is1
See Figure 17 for reference.

Note: The above equation assumes negligivle relay impedance.
The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum
declared resistance.
Page 64 of 103
USE OF “ METROSIL” NON-LINEAR RESISTORS

Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current
transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level
of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally
able to withstand 3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage
that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during
an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage
and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if
current transformer saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a
function of maximum internal fault secondary current, the current transformer
ratio, the current transformer secondary winding resistance , the current
transformer lead resistance to the common point, the relay lead resistance and
the stabilising resistor value.
VP = 2 2 VK (Vf - VK )
Vf = I f’ (R CT + 2RL + R ST )
where:
Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur.
I‘f = maximum internal secondary fault current.
Rct = current transformer secondary winding resistance.
RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
RST = relay stabilising resistor.
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils
should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the
purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from
the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their
operating characteristics follow the expression:
V = CI 0.25
where
V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” )
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” )
I = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ) .
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would
be approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated
as follows;
4
 Vs(rms) x 2 
I (rms) = 0.52 

 C 
Page 65 of 103
where
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“ metrosil” ) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
i. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ) current should
be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA r.m.s. for 1A
current transformers and approximately 100mA r.m.s. for 5A current
transformers.
ii. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“ metrosil” ) should
limit the voltage to 1500V r.m.s. or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher
relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to
1500V r.m.s., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required,
depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the
following restrictions:-
30mA rms
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit
should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown
in the following table:
Relay Voltage Nominal Characteristic Recommended Metrosil Type

Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless
otherwise specified by the customer
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following
requirements:-
100mA rms (the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below
their type description.
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay
settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence
higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
Page 66 of 103
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and
single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary Recommended METROSIL Type

internal
fault current Relay Voltage Setting
Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223

50A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C =670/800 C = 740/870*

100A C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C =570/670 C =620/740*

150A C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C = 570/670** C =620/740***
100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rm
Note: *2400V peak **2200V peak ***2600V peak

In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control for detailed applications.
Notes:
1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be
applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole
units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated for
each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil
type", followed by the single pole type reference.
2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can
be supplied if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the
Applications department at ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control.
2.17 100% stator earth fault protection
As stated in Sections 2.13 and 2.14, standard residual current or residual
overvoltage protection elements can provide earth fault protection for 95% of
the generator stator winding. Earth faults in the final 5% of the winding will
result in such a low fault current or such a small imbalance in voltage that
conventional protection cannot be relied upon to detect the fault. In most
applications this limitation is accepted due to the low probability of a fault
occurring in the 5% of the stator winding closest to the star point, where the
voltage to earth is lowest.
Most generators will produce third harmonic voltage to some degree. The third
harmonic voltage measured at the neutral of the machine will drop for faults
close to the neutral. To detect faults in the last 5% of the generator winding, the
P343 relay is provided with a third harmonic undervoltage element. This,
together with the residual overvoltage or stator earth fault protection elements,
will provide protection for faults over the complete winding.
Page 67 of 103
A normal level of third harmonic voltage of 1% is sufficient to ensure that third

harmonic undervoltage and residual overvoltage protection functions will
overlap hence providing 100% coverage for earth faults on the stator winding.
In general, third harmonic undervoltage protection alone can provide coverage
for faults on 30% of the generator winding.
The element operates from the same input as the neutral voltage displacement
protection and must be supplied from a VT connected in the generator earth
connection as shown in Figure 19.
Vn
MiCOM
P343
Figure 19: Connections for 3rd harmonic undervoltage 100% stator earth fault
protection
DDB signals are available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:-
DDB300, Trip:- DDB178). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to
be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the “ COMMISSION TESTS” column in
the relay.
Interlocking may be required to prevent false operation during certain
conditions. For example, some machines do not produce third harmonic voltage
until they are loaded. In this case, one stage of the overcurrent protection
element or the undercurrent element could be used to detect load current and
this could be gated, via the relay programmable scheme logic, with the third
harmonic undervoltage element to prevent false tripping under no load
conditions. A terminal voltage check is also used to supervise this function to
prevent operation when the machine is dead.
Setting ranges for the 100% stator earth fault third harmonic undervoltage
protection element are shown in the following table:
Page 68 of 103

Min Max
GROUP 1: 100% EF
100% St EF Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
100% St EF VN3H< 1V 0.3V 20V 0.1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
4V 1.2V 80V 0.4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
100% St EF Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

100% St EF V<Inh 80V 30V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320V 120V 480V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
2.17.1 Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection

The 100% stator earth fault protection element can be selected by setting the
“ 100% St EF Status” cell to ‘Enabled’.
The third harmonic undervoltage threshold, “ 100% St EF VN3H<” , must be set
below the level of third harmonic voltage present under normal conditions. This
voltage can be determined by viewing the “ VN 3rd Harmonic” cell in the
“ MEASUREMENTS 3” menu. A typical value for this threshold could be 0.5V.
A time delay for the element can be set in the “ 100% St EF Delay” cell.
The terminal voltage interlock threshold, used to prevent operation of the
element when the machine is not running, “ 100% St EF V<Inh” , should typically
be set to 80% of machine rated voltage.
NOTE: Other earth fault protection (residual overvoltage or current operated
stator earth fault protection) must also be enabled to provide coverage for earth
faults across the complete stator winding.
2.18 Overfluxing protection
Overfluxing or overexcitation of a generator, or transformer connected to the
terminals of a generator, can occur if the ratio of voltage to frequency exceeds
certain limits. High voltage or low frequency, causing a rise in the V/Hz ratio,
will produce high flux densities in the magnetic core of the machine or
transformer. This could cause the core of the generator or transformer to
saturate and stray flux to be induced in un-laminated components that have not
been designed to carry flux. The resulting eddy currents in solid components
(e.g. core bolts and clamps) and end of core laminations can cause rapid
overheating and damage.
Overfluxing is most likely to occur during machine start up or shut down whilst
the generator is not connected to the system. Failures in the automatic control of
the excitation system, or errors in the manual control of the machine field
circuit, could allow excessive voltage to be generated. It is also possible for
overfluxing to occur during parallel operation when the generator has been
synchronised with the local supply network. Sudden loss of load could cause an
overvoltage condition, in such circumstances, if the generator excitation system
does not respond correctly.
Page 69 of 103
The P342/343 relays provide a two stage overfluxing element. The element
measures the ratio of voltage to frequency, V/Hz, and will operate when this
ratio exceeds the setting. One stage can be set to operate with a definite time
or inverse time delay, this stage can be used to provide the protection trip
output. The other stage has a definite time delay characteristic and can be
used as an alarm stage to indicate unhealthy conditions before damage has
occurred to the machine.
DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of the protection,
(Start:- DDB324, Trip:- DDB191). A further DDB ‘Alarm’ signal is generated from
the overfluxing alarm stage (DDB128). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the “ Monitor Bit x” cells of the
Setting ranges for the Overfluxing protection element are shown in the following
table:

Min Max
Group 1 Volts/Hz
V/f Alarm Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
V/f Alarm Set 2.31 V/Hz 1.5 V/Hz 3.5 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
9.24 V/Hz 6 V/Hz 14 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V/f Alarm Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

V/f Trip Func DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
V/f Trip Setting 2.42 V/Hz 1.5 V/Hz 3.5 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
9.24 V/Hz 6 V/Hz 14 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
V/f Trip TMS 1 1 63 1

V/f Trip Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
The inverse time characteristic has the following formula:
0.18 + TMS
t = 0.8 +
(M - 1)2
V/f
Where M =
(V/f Trip Setting )
V = measured voltage
f = measured frequency
Page 70 of 103
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection

The overfluxing protection element trip stage can be selected by setting the
“ V/f Trip Func” cell to the required time delay characteristic; ‘DT’ for definite
time operation, ‘IDMT’, for inverse time operation. The overfluxing protection
trip stage is disabled if “ V/f Trip Func” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The overfluxing protection alarm stage may be Enabled/Disabled in the
“ V/f Alarm Status” cell.
In general, a generator or generator transformer overflux condition will occur if
the V/Hz ratio exceeds 1.05p.u. i.e. a 5% overvoltage condition at rated
frequency.
The element is set in terms of the actual ratio of voltage to frequency; the
overfluxing threshold setting, “ V/f Trip Setting” , can therefore be calculated as
shown below:
V 110
V/f Trip Setting = 1.05 x = 1.05 x = 2.31
f 50
where - the VT secondary voltage at rated primary volts is 110V
- the rated frequency is 50Hz
The overfluxing alarm stage threshold setting, “ V/f Alarm Set” , can be set lower
than the trip stage setting to provide an indication that abnormal conditions
are present and alert an operator to adjust system parameters accordingly.
The time delay settings should be chosen to match the withstand characteristics
of the protected generator or generator/transformer. If an inverse time
characteristic is selected, the time multiplier setting, “ V/f Trip TMS” , should be
chosen so the operating characteristic closely matches the withstand
characteristic of the generator or generator/transformer. If a definite time
setting is chosen for the trip stage the time delay is set in the “ V/f Trip Delay”
cell. The alarm stage time delay is set in the “ V/f Alarm Delay” cell.
Reference should be made to manufacturers withstand characteristics before
formulating these settings.
2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection
Accidental energisation of a generator when the machine is not running can
cause severe damage to the machine. If the breaker is closed, when the
machine is at standstill, the generator will begin to act as an induction motor
with the surface of the rotor core and the rotor winding slot wedges acting as
the rotor current conductors. This abnormal current in the rotor can cause arcing
between components, eg. slot wedge to core, and results in rapid overheating
and damage.
To provide fast protection for this condition, the P343 relay provides an
instantaneous overcurrent element that is gated with a three phase
undervoltage detector. The scheme logic of this function is shown in Figure 20.
The element is enabled when the machine is not running, ie. not generating
any voltage, or when the breaker is open. Therefore the element can have a
low current setting, resulting in high speed operation when required. For the
element to operate correctly the relay voltage input must be from a machine
side VT; busbar VTs cannot be used.
Page 71 of 103
50
& Trip
27
tPU
& tDO
VTS
50 = instantaneous overcurrent detector

27 = 3 phase undervoltage detector
VTS = VT fail output from voltage transformer supervision logic
Figure 20: Fixed scheme logic for unintentional energisation of standstill protection
Setting ranges for the Dead Machine/Unintentional Energisation protection
element are shown in the following table:

Min Max
GROUP 1: DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Dead Mach I> 0.1 In A 0.08 In A 4 In A 0.01 In A
Dead Mach V< 80 V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V) (Vn=400/440V)
Dead Mach tPU 5s 0s 10 s 0.1 s

Dead Mach tDO 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for dead machine protection

The dead machine protection element can be selected by setting the
“ Dead Mach Status” cell to ‘Enabled’.
The overcurrent threshold, “ Dead Mach I>” , can be set to less than full load
current as the element will not be enabled during normal machine operation. A
setting of 10% of full load current can typically be used.
The undervoltage threshold, “ Dead Mach V<” , should typically be set at 85%
of the nominal voltage to ensure that the element is enabled when the machine
is not running.
The pick-up time delay, “ Dead Mach tPU” , which provides a small time delay to
prevent initialisation of the element during system faults, should typically be set
to 5s, or at least in excess of the protection clearance time for a close up phase
to phase fault.
The drop off time delay, “ Dead Mach tDO” , ensures that the element remains
Page 72 of 103
initialised following accidental closure of the circuit breaker, when the

undervoltage detector could reset. A delay of 500ms will ensure that the
element can operate when required.
2.20 Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection
Prolonged overloading of generators may cause their windings to overheat,
resulting in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation
failure. Worn or unlubricated bearings can also generate localised heating
within the bearing housing. To protect against any general or localised
overheating, the P343 relay has the ability to accept inputs from upto 10
3 wire Type A PT100 resistive temperature sensing devices (RTD). These are
connected as shown in Figure 21 below.
3 wire PT100 RTD 2 wire PT100 RTD
RTD 1 RTD 1
RTD 2 RTD 2
RTD 10 RTD 10
MiCOM P343 MiCOM P343
Figure 21: Connection for RTD thermal probes

Such probes can be strategically placed in areas of the machine which are
susceptible to overheating or heat damage. Where power transformers are
located close to the protected machine, certain RTD probes could be assigned to
provide overtemperature protection for the transformer(s). This could protect
against winding hot spot overheating or overtemperature in the bulk of the
insulating oil.
Typically a PT100 RTD probe can measure temperature within the range -40° to
+300°C. The resistance of these devices changes with temperature, at 0°C they
have a resistance of 100Ω. The temperature at each probe location can be
determined by the relay, and is available for:
Temperature monitoring, displayed locally, or remotely via the relay
communications.
Alarming, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set
time delay.
Tripping, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set
time delay.
Should the measured resistance be outside of the permitted range, an RTD
failure alarm will be raised, indicating an open or short circuit RTD input. These
conditions are signalled via DDB signals available within the PSL (DDB130-134).
Page 73 of 103
DDB signals are also available to indicate the trip of the each RTD,
(DDB192-201). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed
Note that direct temperature measurement can provide more reliable thermal
protection than devices which use a thermal replica energised from phase
current. The latter is susceptible to inaccuracies in time constants used by the
replica model, and also inaccuracies due to the variation in ambient
temperature.
Setting ranges for the RTD Thermal protection are shown in the following table:

Min Max
GROUP 1: RTD PROTECTION
Select RTD 0000000000 Bit 0 - Select RTD 1
Bit 1 - Select RTD 2
RTD x Alarm Set 80°C 0° C 200°C 1° C
RTD x Alarm Dly 10s 0 100s 1s
RTD x Trip Set 85°C 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD x Trip Dly 1s 0 100s 1s
Where x = 1 to 10
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection

Each RTD can be enabled by setting the relevant bit in “ Select RTD” . For
example if Select RTD is set to 0000000111, then RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 would
be enabled and the associated settings would be visible in the menu.
The temperature setting for the alarm stage for each RTD can be set in the
“ RTD x Alarm Set” cells and the alarm time delay in the “ RTD x Alarm Dly” cell.
The temperature setting for the trip stage for each RTD can be set in the
“ RTD x Trip Set” cells and the trip stage time delay in the “ RTD x Trip Dly” cell.
Typical operating temperatures for protected plant are given in the table below.
These are provided as a guide, actual figures MUST be obtained from the
equipment manufacturers:
Page 74 of 103
Parameter Typical Service Temperature Short Term Overloading

at Full Load
Bearing 60 - 80°C, depending on 60 - 80°C+
temperature the type of bearing.
generators
Top oil 80°C (50 - 60°C above A temperature gradient
temperature of ambient). from winding
transformers temperature is usually
assumed, such that top
oil RTDs can provide
winding protection.
Winding hot 98°C for normal ageing of 140°C+ during
spot insulation.Cyclic overloading emergencies.
temperature might give
Table showing typical operating temperatures of plant.

2.21 Pole slipping protection
A generator might pole-slip, or fall out-of-step with other power system sources,
in the event of failed or abnormally weak excitation or as a result of delayed
system fault clearance. This can be further aggravated when there is a weak
(high reactance) transmission link between the generator and the rest of the
power system.
The process of pole-slipping following excitation failure is discussed in
Section 2.10. The P340 field failure protection function should respond to such
situations to give a time delayed trip. The electrical/mechanical power/torque
oscillations following excitation failure may be relatively gentle. If pole slipping
occurs with maximum excitation (generator emf >2.0 p.u.), the power/torque
oscillations and power system voltage fluctuations following loss of stability can
be much more severe. For large machines there may be a requirement to
provide protection to trip the generator under such circumstances, to prevent
plant damage or remove the disturbance to the power system.
Pole-slipping protection is frequently requested for relatively small generators
running in parallel with strong public supplies. This might be where a co-
generator runs in parallel with the distribution system of a public utility, which
may be a relatively strong source, but where high-speed protection for
distribution system faults is not provided. The delayed clearance of system faults
may pose a stability threat for the co-generation plant.
With the P340 relay there is no specific pole-slipping protection function, but a
number of the protection functions provided can offer a method of ensuring
delayed tripping, if appropriately applied.
2.21.1 Reverse power protection
During a pole slipping event the machine will cyclically absorb and export
power as the machine rotor slips with respect to the power system. Therefore,
any power element selected to operate from reverse power can pick-up during
the pole slip. Reverse power protection tripping is usually time delayed and this
time delay will prevent the element from tripping during a pole slip. However,
each power protection stage in the P340 relay has an associated delay on
Page 75 of 103
drop off, or reset, timer (“ Power1 DO Timer” , “ Power2 DO Timer” ). This can be
used to prevent resetting of the reverse power stage during a pole slipping
event, leading to eventual tripping if the event continues.
2.21.2 System back-up protection function
In a similar manner to the power protection function, the system back-up
protection function would operate cyclically with the periodic high levels of
stator current that would arise during pole-slipping. These peaks of current may
also be accompanied by coincident drops in generator terminal voltage, if the
generator is near the electrical centre of swinging. As discussed in Section 2.5,
the system back-up protection function is provided with a timer characteristic
timer-hold setting, “ V Dep OC tRESET” , “ Z< tRESET” , which can be used to
ensure that the protection function will respond to cyclic operation during pole-
slipping. In a similar manner, some operators of small, unmanned hydro-
generators have relied on the integrating action of induction disc overcurrent
protection to ensure disconnection of a persistently slipping machine.
2.21.3 Field failure protection function
Slightly faster pole-slipping protection might be assured in many applications by
appropriately applying the field failure protection function and associated
scheme logic timers.
Where the power system source impedance is relatively small in relation to the
impedance of a generator during pole-slipping, the electrical centre of slipping
is likely to lie within the generator. This would be ‘behind’ the relaying point, as
defined by the location of the voltage transformer. Such a situation is likely to
exist for co-generation schemes and might also be the case for some fairly large
utility generation schemes connected to a densely interconnected transmission
system. The dynamic impedance of the generator during pole-slipping (Xg)
should lie between the average value of the direct and quadrature axis
transient reactance’s (Xd’ and Xq’) and the average value of the direct/
quadrature axis synchronous reactance’s (Xd and Xq). However neither extreme
would actually be reached. During low-slip periods of a pole-slip cycle, the
synchronous reactance’s would apply, whereas the transient impedance’s would
apply during periods of relatively high slip.
Figure 22 illustrates how the impedance seen at the generator protection
relaying point may vary during pole-slipping for a relatively small co-generator
directly connected to a relatively strong distribution power system. It should be
noted that the behaviour of a generator during pole slipping may be further
complicated by intervention of an automatic voltage regulator and by the
response of any speed-dependent excitation source (eg. shaft-driven exciter).
Page 76 of 103
Eg Es
Zg Ir Zs
Base MVA = 15 MVA R

Xd = 130%
Xd' = 34%
Xs = 4.3% (18.37kA at 11kV)
jX
Eg/Es = 2.8 (>max)
Xs R
Eg/Es = 1.2
0.5Xd'
Eg/Es = 1.0
Xg Diameter = Xd
Case: 15 MVA GT Eg/Es = 0.8

Condition: Xg = Xd
Eg/Es = 0.19 (<min)
Figure 22: Field failure protection function characteristics (small co-genrator)

It can be seen from the simple analysis of Figure 22 that the field failure
protection function may respond to the variation in impedance seen during pole
slipping for some applications. However the impedance characteristic offset
might have to be reduced to guarantee response for the theoretical lower range
of dynamic generator impedance (Xg). The lack of the normally recommended
characteristic offset should not pose any problem of unwanted protection
function response during the normal range of operation of a machine (with rotor
angles kept below 90°), but a longer trip time delay might be required to
prevent unwanted protection response during stable power swings caused by
system disturbances. The most marginal condition to detect is where the
generator is fully loaded, with maximum excitation applied. Even if the
impedance characteristic offset is not reduced, impedance element pick up
should still occur during part of a slip cycle, when the machine impedance is
high and where the rotor angle is high. More careful consideration might have
to be given to the reset time delay setting (“ FFail1 DO Timer” ) required in such
circumstances.
During pole-slipping, any operation of the field failure protection function will
be cyclic and so it would be necessary to set the reset time delay
(“ FFail1 DO Timer” ) to be longer than the time for which the impedance seen
will cyclically lie outside the field failure characteristic. A typical delay setting
might be 0.6s, to cover slip frequencies in excess of 2Hz. When the timer
“ FFail1 DO Timer” is set, the field failure trip time delay (“ FFail1 TimeDelay” )
must be increased to be greater than the setting of “ FFail1 DO Timer” .
Page 77 of 103
Sometimes pole-slipping protection must be guaranteed, especially in the case

of a larger utility generator connected to a relatively weak transmission system.
In such applications, and where fast tripping is required, or where the
pole-slipping response of field failure protection function is otherwise uncertain,
a stand-alone protection scheme, using HV current and voltage signals, should
supplement. The delayed detection and tripping offered by the P340 Field
Failure protection function should, however, be adequate for many
applications.
For further details regarding setting of field Failure protection for time delayed
pole slipping detection, contact ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control, Applications
Department.
2.22 Circuit breaker failure protection
Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate
and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted
circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and
prevent damage / further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-
transmssion systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is
therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which
monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the
fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit
breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate.
CBF operation can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that
the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output
contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are
removed.
2.22.1 Breaker failure protection configurations
The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’
and ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’, allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
Simple CBF, where only ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is enabled. For any protection trip,
the ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker
opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, ‘CB Fail 1
Timer’ times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using
the programmable scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream
switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar
section.
A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is
used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This
requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping.
Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued
following an additional time delay. The backtrip uses ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’,
which is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ and ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’ can be configured to
operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an
external protection trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay
opto-isolated inputs to ‘External Trip’ using the programmable scheme logic.
2.22.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays
to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current,
Page 78 of 103
as required. This covers the following situations:

Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied
upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This
may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional
arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely
limit fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of
the element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has
opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses
operation of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit
breaker poles have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the
undercurrent elements may not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker
fail in all applications. For example:
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage
transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected
circuit would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the
initiating protection element might be a more reliable method.
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected
voltage transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally
being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the
initiating condition from the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection
element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker
auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay’s
pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only
allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting
options are summarised in the following table:
Initiation (Menu selectable) CB fail timer reset mechnaism

Current based protection - The resetting mechanism is fixed.
(eg. 50/51/46/21/87..) [IA< operates] &
[IB< operates] &
[IC< operates] &
[IN< operates]
Sensitive earth fault element The resetting mechanism is fixed.
[ISEF< operates]
Non-current based protection Three options are available.
(eg. 27/59/81/32L..) The user can select from the following
options.
[All I< and IN< elements operate]
[Protection element reset] AND
CB open (all 3 poles) AND
Page 79 of 103
External protection - Three options are available. The user can

select any or all of the options.
[External trip reset] AND
CB open (all 3 poles) AND
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:
Menu text Default Min Max Step

CB FAIL + I<
Breaker Fail {Sub-Heading}
CB Fail 1 Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 1 Timer 0.2s 0s 10s 0.01s
CB Fail 2 Status Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 2 Timer 0.4s 0s 10s 0.01s
CBF Non I Reset CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
CBF Ext Reset CB Open & I< I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<
Under Current {Sub-Heading}
I< Current Set 0.1In 0.02In 3.2In 0.01In
IN< Current Set 0.1In 0.02In 3.2In 0.01In
ISEF< Current 0.02In 0.001In 0.8In 0.00025In
Blocked O/C {Sub-Heading}
CBF Blocks I> Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CBF Blocks IN> Disabled Enabled, Disabled
The ‘CBF Blocks I>‘ and ‘CBF Blocks IN>‘ settings are used to remove starts
issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker
fail time out. The start is removed when the cell is set to Enabled.
2.22.3 Typical settings
2.22.3.1Breaker fail timer settings
Typical timer settings to use are as follows:
CB Fail Reset Mechanism tBF time delay Typical delay for 2½

cycle circuit breaker
Initiating element reset CB interrupting time 50 + 50 + 10 + 50 =
+ element reset time 160 ms
(max.) + error in tBF
timer + safety margin
Page 80 of 103
CB open CB auxiliary contacts 50 + 10 + 50 =

opening/closing time 110 ms
(max) + error in tBF
timer + safety margin
Undercurrent elements CB interrupting time 50 + 25 + 50 =
+ undercurrent 125 ms
element (max.) +
safety margin
operating time
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent
elements. Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent
time setting should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2½ cycle circuit breaker.
Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15 ms
must be added to allow for trip relay operation.
2.22.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings
The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to
ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A
typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common
for generator circuit breaker CBF.
The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standby earth fault (SBEF)
undercurrent elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically
as follows:
ISEF<= (ISEF> trip) / 2
IN< = (IN> trip) / 2
2.23 Breaker flashover protection
Prior to generator synchronisation, or just following generator tripping, where
the protected generator could be slipping with respect to a power system, it is
possible to establish at least twice rated phase-neutral voltage across the
generator circuit breaker. An even higher voltage might briefly be established
just after generator tripping for prime mover failure, where the pre-failure level
of excitation might be maintained until AVR action takes place. Whilst generator
circuit breakers must be designed to handle such situations, the probability of
breaker interrupter breakdown or breakdown of open terminal switch gear
insulators is increased and such failures have occurred.
This mode of breaker failure is most likely to occur on one phase initially and
can be detected by a neutral current measuring element. If the generator is
directly connected to the power system, the second stage of stator earth fault
protection (“ IN>2 ...” ) could be applied as an instantaneous element by
setting the time delay “ IN>2 TimeDelay” to 0s, to quickly detect the flashover.
To prevent loss of co-ordination this stage must be blocked when the circuit
breaker is closed. This can be programmed by correct configuration of the
programmable scheme logic and can be integrated into the circuit breaker fail
logic, as shown in Figure 23.
Where the machine is connected to the system via a step-up transformer a
similar scheme can be arranged. The P340 relay standby earth fault protection
Page 81 of 103
element can be connected to measure the transformer HV earth fault current to

provide the breaker flashover protection, via suitable scheme logic. The
machine earth fault protection can be provided by the P340 sensitive earth
fault protection element, as shown in Figure 24.
Scheme logic in PSL

DDB 39
L8 52-B
& DDB 168

Extern Trip 3ph
IN>2 Trip
DDB 205
IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100
MiCOM
P343
Figure 23: Breaker falshover protection for directly connected machine
Scheme logic in PSL

DDB 39
L8 52-B
& DDB 168

Extern Trip 3ph
IN>2 Trip
DDB 205
IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100
MiCOM
P343
Figure 24: Breaker flashover protection for indirectly connected machine

2.24 Blocked overcurrent protection
Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from
downstream relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows
identical current and time settings to be employed on each of the relays
involved in the scheme, as the relay nearest to the fault does not receive a
blocking signal and hence trips discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore
reduces the amount of required grading stages and consequently fault
clearance times.
The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast
acting overcurrent elements on the incoming feeders to a substation which are
Page 82 of 103
then arranged to be blocked by start contacts from the relays protecting the
outgoing feeders. The fast acting element is thus allowed to trip for a fault
condition on the busbar but is stable for external feeder faults by means of the
blocking signal. This type of scheme therefore provides much reduced fault
clearance times for busbar faults than would be the case with conventional time
graded overcurrent protection. The availability of multiple overcurrent and earth
fault stages means that back-up time graded overcurrent protection is also
provided. This is shown in Figures 25a and 25b.
Incomer
Block highset element

P140
CB fail backtrip
P140 P140 P140 P140
O/P CB
from fail
start backtrip
contact
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4
Figure 25a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)
10.0
1.0
Time Incomer IDMT element
(secs) IDMT margin
0.1 Feeder IDMT element
Incomer high set element
0.08
Time to block
Feeder start contact
0.01
1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (kA)
Figure 25b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)

Page 83 of 103
The P140 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the
overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start
signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly.
Each stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the
relevant opto-isolated input.
Note that the P140 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the opto-
inputs. Hence, in the unlikely event of the faulure of this supply, blocking of that
relay would not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervised and
if a failure is detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme
logic, to provide an output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to
signal an alarm within the substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic
could be arranged to block any of the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would
operate non-discriminatively due to the blocking signal failure.
For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control Ltd.
Section 3. APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
3.1 VT supervision
The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the
ac voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage
transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays.
This usually results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the
ac voltage input there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on
the power system, as measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and
automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability
would otherwise be compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also
available.
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply.
These are defined below:
1.Loss of one or two phase voltages
2.Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
3.Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
4.Loss of one or two phase voltages
The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase
sequence (nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence
current. This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability
of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of
nps current. The use of negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation
even where three-limb or ‘V’ connected VT’s are used.
Negative sequence VTS element:
The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V (or 40V on
a 380/440V rated relay), and I2 = 0.05 to 0.5In settable (defaulted to
0.05In).
Page 84 of 103
3.1.1 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions

Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative
phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under
such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is
detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals
(which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In
practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which
are changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by
comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle
previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current
should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal
will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS.
The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V (40V on
380/440V relays) and pickup at 30V (120V on 380/440V relays).
The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1In.
3.1.2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect
operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element
detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no
corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a
change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example). An
alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line
energisation.
The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be
as a result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a
close up three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the
voltage dependent function and the second would require tripping. To
differentiate between these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS I>
Inhibit) is used which will prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates.
This element should be set in excess of any non-fault based currents on line
energisation (load, line charging current, transformer inrush current if
applicable) but below the level of current produced by a close up 3 phase fault.
If the line is now closed where a 3 phase VT failure is present the overcurrent
detector will not operate and a VTS block will be applied. Closing onto a three
phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent detector and prevent a VTS
block being applied.
This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the
relays pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions ie.
where no voltage will be present and the VTS I> Inhibit overcurrent element will
not be picked up.
3.1.3 Menu settings
The VTS settings are found in the ‘SUPERVISION’ column of the relay menu. The
relevant settings are detailed below:
Page 85 of 103
GROUP 1:
SUPERVISION Default Min Max Step
VTS Status Blocking Blocking, Indication
VTS Reset Mode Manual Manual, Auto
VTS Time Delay 5s 1s 10s 0.1s
VTS I> Inhibit 10In 0.08In 32In 0.01In
VTS I2> Inhibit 0.05In 0.05In 0.5In 0.01In
The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:

VTS set to provide alarm indication only;
Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements;
Optional conversion of directional overcurrent elements to non-directional
protection (available when set to blocking mode only). These settings are
found in the function links cell of the relevant protection element columns in
the menu.
The VTS I> Inhibit or VTS I2> Inhibit elements are used to overide a VTS block
in event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic.
Once the VTS block has been established, however, then it would be
undesirable for subsequent system faults to override the block. The VTS block
will therefore be latched after a user settable time delay ‘VTS Time Delay’.
Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. The
first is manually via the front panel interface (or remote communications)
provided the VTS condition has been removed and secondly, when in ‘Auto’
mode, by the restoration of the 3 phase voltages above the phase level
detector settings mentioned previously.
A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the
case where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate,
depending on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS
indication will be given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is
given.
Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage
transformer ac output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to
indicate a three phase output disconnection. As previously described, it is
possible for the VTS logic to operate correctly without this input. However, this
facility has been provided for compatibility with various utilities current
practices. Energising an opto-isolated input assigned to “ MCB Open” on the
relay will therefore provide the necessary block.
Where directional overcurrent elements are converted to non-directional
protection on VTS operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting
of these elements is higher than full load current.
3.2 CT supervision
The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or
more of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an
open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of
any current operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current
Page 86 of 103
circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated.

3.2.1 The CT supervision feature
The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in
the absence of corresponding derived residual voltage that would normally
accompany it.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages
from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be
enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single
phase units, and has the primary star point earthed.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD
and event record (plus DDB 115: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block
(DDB 290: CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements
operating from derived quantities (Broken Conductor, Earth Fault2, Neg Seq
O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element; other
protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating
DDB 290: CTS Block with the protection function logic.
The following table shows the relay menu for the CT supervision element,
including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:-

Min Max
GROUP 1: SUPERVISION
CT Supervision Sub Heading
CTS Status Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
CTS VN< Inhibit 1 0.5 / 2V For 110/440V respectively
22 / 88V For 110/440V respectively
0.5 / 2V For 110/440V respectively
CTS IN> Set 0 0.08 x In 4 x In 0.01 x In
CTS Time Delay 5 0s 10s 1s
3.2.2 Setting the CT supervision element

The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting,
"CTS In> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy
system conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the
maximum steady state residual voltage. The "CTS In> set" will typically be set
below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is
generally set to 5 seconds.
Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is
unpredictable, the element be disabled to prevent a protection elements being
blocked during fault conditions.
3.2.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of
the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open
or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching
Page 87 of 103
operations. The relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an

indication of the position of the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an
alarm is raised.
If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time
delay. A normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to
this function via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to
avoid unwanted operation during normal switching duties.
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called ‘CB
Status Input’. This cell can be set at one of the following four options:
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
Where ‘None’ is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect
any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control,
auto-reclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume
a 52B signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status
information will be available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be
available. The above is also true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and
52B are used then status information will be available and in addition a
discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to the following table. 52A and
52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs via the PSL.
Auxiliary Contact Position CB State Detected Action

52A 52B
Open Closed Breaker Open Circuit breaker healthy
Closed Open Breaker Closed Circuit breaker healthy
Closed Closed CB Failure Alarm raised if the
condition persists for
greater than 5s
Open Open State Unknown Alarm raised if the
condition persists for
greater than 5s
3.2.4 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip
circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting
capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions.
Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed
number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit
breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive
maintenance.
The P140 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip
operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition
to be determined. These montioring features are discussed in the following
section.
Page 88 of 103
3.2.4.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features

For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in
the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are
counter values only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the
counter values. These cells can not be set:
CB Condition Default Min Max Step
CB operations 0 0 10000 1
{3 pole tripping}
CB A operations 0 0 10000 1
{1 & 3 pole tripping}
CB B operations 0 0 10000 1
CB C operations 0 0 10000 1
Total IA Broken 0 0 25000In^ 1
Total IB Broken 0 0 25000In^ 1
Total IC Broken 0 0 25000In^ 1Ιn^
CB operate time 0 0 0.5s 0.001
Reset all values No Yes, No
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a
maintenance inspection and overhaul.
The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition
monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes the setup of the current
broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB
lockout.
CB Monitor Setup Default Min Max Step
Broken I^ 2 1 2 0.1
I^ Maintenance Alarm Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
disabled
I^ Maintenance 1000In^ 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
I^ Lockout Alarm Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
disabled
I^ Lockout 2000In^ 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
No CB ops maint Alarm Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
disabled
No CB ops maint 10 1 10000 1
N CB ops lock
o
Alarm Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
disabled
No CB ops lock 20 1 10000 1
CB time maint Alarm Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
disabled
Page 89 of 103
3.2.4.2 Circuit breaker state monitoring features

MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed
(52b) auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these
contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this
would indicate one of the following conditions:
· Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
· Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
· CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions
would apply:
· Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
· Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
CB Time Maint 0.1s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s

CB Time Lockout Alarm Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled
Disabled
CB Time Lockout 0.2s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Fault Freq Lock Alarm Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled
Disabled
Fault Freq Count 10 0 9999 1
Fault Freq Time 3600s 0 9999s 1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time
the relay issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an
external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition
monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs
(via the programmable scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external
device. The signal that is mapped to the opto is called ‘External Trip’.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring
counters will not be updated.
3.2.5 Event & fault records
The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-
volatile (battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to
establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a
particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available
space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new
one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a
resolution of 1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or
remotely, via the communications ports.
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled ‘VIEW
RECORDS’. This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records
Page 90 of 103
and is shown below:-

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference Description
Select Event Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required
event record from the possible 250 that may be
stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event
and so on.
Time & Date Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal
Real Time Clock
Event Text Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to
following sections)
Event Value Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of
the Event (refer to following sections)
Select Fault Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required
fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A
value of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection
starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements
etc. associated with the fault, ie. the complete fault
record.
Select Report Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required
maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be
stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report
and so on.
Report Text Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence
(refer to following sections)
Report Type These cells are numbers representative of the
occurrence. They form a specific error code which
should be quoted in any related correspondence to
ALSTOM T&D P&C Ltd.
Report Data
Reset Indication Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED
indications provided that the relevant protection
element has reset.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to Chapter 5,

where the procedure is fully explained.
Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is
given in Appendix 1.
Types of Event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm
condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that
constitute an event:-
Page 91 of 103
3.2.6 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs.

If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time
that the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When
this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will
become visible as shown below;
Time & Date of Event

“ LOGIC INPUTS”
“ Event Value
0101010101010101”
The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc.
The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.2.7 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts.
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time
that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event.
When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will
become visible as shown below;
Time & Date of Event

“ OUTPUT CONTACTS”
“ Event Value
010101010101010101010”
The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output
contacts, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output
contact 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and
viewed via PC.
3.2.8 Relay alarm conditions.
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual
events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and
how they appear in the event list:-
Alarm condition Resulting event
Event text Event value
Battery Fail Battery Fail ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
Field Voltage Fail Field V Fail ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
Setting group via opto invalid Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
Protection Disabled Prot’n Disabled ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
Frequency out of range Freq out of Range ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
VTS Alarm VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
CB Trip Fail Protection CB Fail ON/OFF Number from 0 to 31
Page 92 of 103
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the
various alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31.
This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input
and output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction
software, such as MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if
the event is viewed on the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the
description to signify whether the particular condition has become operated or
has reset.
3.2.9 Protection element starts and trips
Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be
logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated
element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event
extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is
therefore invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD.
3.2.10 General events
A number of events come under the heading of ‘General Events’ - an example
is shown below:-
Nature of Event Displayed text in event Displayed value
record
Level 1 password modified, PW1 edited UI, F or R 0
either from user interface,
front or rear port
A complete list of the ‘General Events’ is given in Appendix 1.

3.2.11 Fault records.
Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event
simply states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time
stamp.
Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the ‘Select Fault’
cell further down the ‘VIEW RECORDS’ column, which is selectable from up to 5
records. These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements
etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more
accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event
is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated.
3.2.12 Maintenance reports
Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog
failure, field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The
Maintenance Report holds up to 5 such ‘events’ and is accessed from the
‘Select Report’ cell at the bottom of the ‘VIEW RECORDS’ column.
Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a ‘Type’ and ‘Data’ cell,
which are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in
further detail in Appendix 1.
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The
event simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time
stamp.
Page 93 of 103
3.2.13 Setting changes

Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples
are shown in the following table:-
Type of Setting Change Displayed Text in Event Displayed Value
Record
Control/Support Setting C & S Changed 0
Group 1 Change Group 1 Changed 1
Note: Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT

ratio settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting
groups. When any of these settings are changed, the event record is
created simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance
recorder settings will only generate an event once the settings have
been confirmed at the ‘setting trap’.
3.2.14 Resetting of event / fault records
If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may
be done from within the ‘RECORD CONTROL’ column.
3.2.15 Viewing Event Records via MiCOM S1 Support Software
When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly
different than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of
how various events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:-
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23
Event Type: Protection operation
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Fault record
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000
ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Logic input changed state
Page 94 of 103
- Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000

ALSTOM : MiCOM
Model Number: P141
Event Type: Relay output changed state
As can be seen , the first line gives the description and time stamp for the
event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be
collapsed via the +/- symbol.
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
Appendix 1.
3.3 Disturbance recorder
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside
for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent
upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability
of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. Disturbance
records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at
which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest
one.
The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per
cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two
digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue
channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The ‘DISTURBANCE RECORDER’ menu column is shown below:-

Min Max
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 1.5s 0.1s 10.5s 0.01s
Trigger Position 33.3% 0 100% 0.1%
Trigger Mode Single Single or Extended
Analog Channel 1 VAN VAN,VBN,VCN,VCHECK
SYNC,IA,IB,IC,IN,
IN SEF
Analog Channel 2 VBN As above
Analog Channel 3 VCN As above
Analog Channel 4 IA As above
Analog Channel 5 IB As above
Analog Channel 6 IC As above
Analog Channel 7 IN As above
Analog Channel 8 IN SEF As above
Page 95 of 103
Digital Inputs 1 to 32 Relays 1 to 7/14

Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts
and/or
Opto’s 1 to 8/16
Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs
or
Internal Digital Signals
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger No Trigger No Trigger, Trigger L/H,
except Dedicated Trigger H/L
Trip Relay O/P’s which are set to Trigger L/H
Note: The available analogue and digital signals will differ between relay
types and models and so the individual courier database in Chapter 5
should be referred to when determining default settings etc.
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the
‘Duration’ and ‘Trigger Position’ cells. ‘Duration’ sets the overall recording time
and the ‘Trigger Position’ sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration.
For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to
1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s
post fault recording times.
If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will
ignore the trigger if the ‘Trigger Mode’ has been set to ‘Single’. However, if this
has been set to ‘Extended’, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby
extending the recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable
from the available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be
mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a
number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LED’s etc. The
complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in
the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels
may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or
a high to low transition, via the ‘Input Trigger’ cell. The default trigger settings
are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the
recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must
be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully
explained in Chapter 5.
3.4 Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power
system quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second
basis and are summarised below:
Phase Voltages and Currents
Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents
Sequence Voltages and currents
Power and Energy Quantities
Rms. Voltages and Currents
Page 96 of 103
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values

There are also measured values from the protection functions, which also
displayed under the measurement columns of the menu; these are described in
the section on the relevant protection function.
3.4.1 Measured voltages and currents
The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and
current values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier
Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both magnitude
and phase angle measurement.
3.4.2 Sequence voltages and currents
Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier
values; these are displayed as magnitude values.
3.4.3 Power and energy quantities
Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent,
real and reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase
basis together with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual
phase values. The signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be
controlled using the measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in
the table below:
Measurement Parameter Signing
Mode
0 (Default) Export Power +
Import Power -
Lagging VArs -
Leading VArs +
1 Export Power -
Import Power +
Lagging VArs -
Leading VArs +
2 Export Power +
Import Power -
Lagging VArs +
Leading VArs -
3 Export Power -
Import Power +
Lagging VArs +
Leading VArs -
Page 97 of 103
In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power
factor on a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor.
These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive
energy measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the
total exported and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented
up to maximum values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will
reset to zero, it is also possible to reset these values using the menu or remote
interfaces using the Reset Demand cell.
3.4.4 Rms. voltages and currents
Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the
sum of the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data.
3.4.5 Demand values
The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset
Demand menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface
or the remote communications.
3.4.5.1 Fixed demand values
The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified
interval; values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real
and reactive power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those
for the previous interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand
period.
3.4.5.2 Rolling demand values
The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the
difference being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window
consists of a number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window
is the sub-period length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of
each of the sub-periods.
3.4.5.3 Peak demand values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and
reactive power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured
quantity since the last reset of the demand values.
3.4.6 Settings
The following settings under the heading Measurement Setup can be used to
configure the relay measurement function.
Measurement Setup Default Value Options/Limits
Default Display Description Description/Plant Reference/
Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N
Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date
and time
Local Values Primary Primary/Secondary
Remote Values Primary Primary/Secondary
Measurement Ref VA VA/VB/VC/IA/ IB/ I C
Measurement Mode 0 0 to 3 Step 1
Page 98 of 103
Fix Dem Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute

Roll Sub Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Num Sub Periods 1 1 to 15 step 1
Distance Unit* Km Km/miles
Fault Location* Distance Distance/Ohms/% of Line
* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location.
3.4.6.1 Default display
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options,
note that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default
level using the × and Ø keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the
default display will revert to that selected by this setting.
3.4.6.2 Local values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface
and the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
3.4.6.3 Remote values
This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port
are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
3.4.6.4 Measurement REF
Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay
can be selected.
3.4.6.5 Measurement mode
This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power
quantities; the signing convention used is defined in Table XX.
3.4.6.6 Fixed demand period
This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window.
3.4.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the
calculation of rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this
window.
3.4.6.8 Distance unit
This setting is used to select the unit of distance for fault location purposes, note
that the length of the line is preserved when converting from km to miles and
visa versa.
3.4.6.9 Fault location
The calculated fault location can be displayed using one of several options
selected using this setting.
Page 99 of 103
Section 4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
The current transformer requirements for each current input will depend on the
protection function with which they are related and whether the line current
transformers are being shared with other current inputs. Where current
transformers are being shared by multiple current inputs, the kneepoint voltage
requirements should be calculated for each input and the highest calculated
value used.
4.1 Generator differential function
4.1.1 Biased differential protection
The kneepoint voltage requirements for the current transformers used for the
current inputs of the generator differential function, with settings of Is1 =
0.05In, k1 = 0%, Is2 = 1.2In, k2=150%, and with a boundary condition of
through fault current ≤ 10In and X/R ratio
≤ 120, is:
Vk ≥ 50 I n (R ct + 2R L + R r ) with a minimum of 60
In
Where:
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault stability.
In = Relay rated current.
Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω).
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω).
Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current transformer (Ω).
For Class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated
kneepoint voltage requirement should be less than 2.5In. For IEC standard
protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are
used.
4.1.2 High impedance differential protection
If the generator differential protection function is to be used to implement high
impedance differential protection, then the current transformer requirements will
be as follows:
Rs = [1.5 * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS1
VK ≥ 2 * Is * Rs
where
Rs = Value of stabilising resistor (ohms)
If = Maximum through fault current level (amps)
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts)
I S1 = Current setting of REF element (amps)
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Page 100 of 103
4.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase

sequence protection functions
When determining the current transformer requirements for an input that
supplies several protection functions, it must be ensured that the most onerous
condition is met. This has been taken into account in the formula given below.
The formula is equally applicable for current transformers mounted at either the
neutral-tail end or terminal end of the generator.
Vk ≥ 20 I n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )
Where:
I n = Relay rated current.
For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 1.0In. For IEC standard protection class
current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
4.3 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current
input
4.3.1 Line current transformers
With reference to Section 2.15, the sensitive directional earth fault input current
transformer could be driven by three residually connected line current
transformers.
It has been assumed that the sensitive directional earth fault protection function
will only be applied when the stator earth fault current is limited to the stator
winding rated current or less. Also assumed is that the maximum X/R ratio for
the impedance to a bus earth fault will be no greater than 5. The required
minimum kneepoint voltage will therefore be:
Vk ≥ 20 I n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )
Where:
For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 0.3In. For IEC standard protection class
current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
Page 101 of 103
4.3.2 Core balanced current transformers

Unlike a line current transformer, the rated primary current for a core balanced
current transformer may not be equal to the stator winding rated current. This
has been taken into account in the formula:
Vk > 6NI n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )
Where:
Stator rated current
N=
Core balanced current transformer rated primary current
Note: N should not be greater than 2. The core balance current transformer
ratio should be selected accordingly.
4.4 Stator earth fault protection function and sensitive directional earth
fault current polarising input
The earth path current input is used by the stator earth fault protection function
and as the current polarising signal for the sensitive directional earth fault
protection function.
The primary rating of the earth path current transformer may not be related to
the stator winding rated current as discussed in Section 2.13. Therefore, the
requirements for the earth path current transformer will be similar to that
detailed in Section 4.3.2, as follows:
Vk > 6NI n (R ct + 2RL + Rr )

Where:
Statorratedcurrent
N=
Earthpath currenttransformer ratedprimarycurrent
Note: N should not be greater than 2. The earth path current transformer ratio
should be selected accordingly.
Page 102 of 103
4.5 Restricted earth fault protection

4.5.1 Low impedance
VK ≥ 24 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40 and If < 15In
VK ≥ 48 * In * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40, 15In < If < 40In
and 40 <X/R < 120, If < 15In
where
VA × ALF
Vk ≈ + ALF × I n × Rct
In
VK = Required CT knee point voltage (volts),

In = rated secondary current (amps),
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer
(ohms),
If = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
4.5.2 High impedance
The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for
through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the
following equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of
the associated stabilising resistor:
Rs = [0.7 * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS1
VK ≥ 4 * Is * Rs
where
Rs = Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms),
If = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts),
I S1 = Current setting of REF element (amps),
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer
(ohms).
4.5 Reverse and low forward power protection functions
For both reverse and low forward power protection function settings greater
than 3% Pn, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current
transformers will not result in any risk of mal-operation or failure to operate.
4.5.1 Protection class current transformers
For less sensitive power function settings (>3%Pn), the phase current input of the
P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded class 5P protection current
transformer.
To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA
burden (at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is
required to drive current.
Page 103 of 103
4.6 Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection

classification to a kneepoint voltage
The suitability of an IEC standard protection class current transformer can be
checked against the kneepoint voltage requirements specified previously in
Section X.
If, for example, the available current transformers have a 15VA 5P 10
designation, then an estimated kneepoint voltage can be obtained as follows:
15 ×10
Vk ≈ + 10 × 5 × 0.2
5
≈ 40V
Where:
Vk = Required kneepoint voltage
VA = Current transformer rated burden (VA)
ALF = Accuracy limit factor
In = Current transformer secondary rated current (A)
Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω)
If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be
ignored.
Example: 400/5A, 15VA 5P 10, Rct = 0.2Ω
Technical Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Chapter 3
Relay Description
Contents
1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1

1.1 Hardware overview 1
1.1.1 Processor board 1
1.1.2 Input module 1
1.1.3 Power supply module 1
1.1.4 RTD board 1
1.1.5 IRIG-B board 1
1.2 Software overview 2
1.2.1 Real-time operating system 3
1.2.2 System services software 3
1.2.3 Platform software 3
1.2.4 Protection and control software 3
1.2.5 Disturbance recorder 3
2. HARDWARE MODULES 4
2.1 Processor board 4
2.2 Internal communication buses 4
2.3 Input module 4
2.3.1 Transformer board 5
2.3.2 Input board 5
2.4 Power supply module (including output relays) 6
2.4.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface 6
2.4.2 Output relay board 7
2.5 RTD board 7
2.6 IRIG-B board 7
2.7 MECHANICAL LAYOUT 7
3. RELAY SOFTWARE 8
3.1 Real-time operating system 9
3.2 System services software 9
3.3 Platform software 9
3.3.1 Record logging 9
3.3.2 Settings database 9
3.3.3 Database interface 10
3.4 Protection and control software 10
3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling 10
3.4.2 Signal processing 10
3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic 11
3.4.4 Event, fault and maintenance recording 11
3.4.5 Disturbance recorder 12
4. SELF TESTING AND DIAGNOSTICS 12
4.1 Start-up self testing 13
4.1.1 System boot 13
4.1.2 Initialisation software 13
4.1.3 Platform software initialisation and monitoring 13
4.2 Continuous self testing 14
Page 1 of 14
Section 1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 Hardware overview

The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made
up of an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard
range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the
user’s requirements.
The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1 Processor board
The processor board performs all calculations for the relay and controls the
operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also
contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and
communication interfaces).
1.1.2 Input module
The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and
digital input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor
board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board
to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue
to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.3 Power supply module
The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules
in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also
provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a
second board the power supply module contains the relays which provide the
output contacts.
1.1.4 RTD board
This optional board can be used to process the signals from up to 10 resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs) to measure the winding and ambient
temperatures.
1.1.5 IRIG-B board
This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available
to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on
this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with
IEC60870 communication only.
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the
processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules
as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample
data from the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the
relay and the flow of information between them.
Page 2 of 14
Present values Executable software

Alarm, event, fault & Default settings &
of all code & data, setting
maintenance parameters, language text,
settings database data
records software code
Battery
Flash
backed-up E2PROM SRAM
EPROM
SRAM
Front LCD panel RS232 Front comms port
Parallel test port

CPU
LEDs Main processor board
Timing data
IRIG-B signal IRIG-B board

optional
Fibre optic
rear comms
port optional
Temperature data
RTD board
RTD inputs optional
(x10)
Serial data bus

(sample data)
Power supply, rear comms Parallel data bus

data, output relay status Digital input values
Output relay contacts (x7)
Digital inputs (x8)

Output relays
Opto-isolated
inputs
Relay board ADC Input board
Power supply (3 voltages),

rear comms data Analogue input signals
Transformer board and

Power supply board auxiliary transformer board
Power Watchdog Field Rear RS485

Current & voltage inputs (up to 13)
supply contacts voltage communication port
Figure 1: Relay modules and information flow
1.2 Software overview

The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-
time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and
the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable
to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction
between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of
explanation here:
Page 3 of 14
1.2.1 Real-time operating system

The real-time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different
parts of the relay’s software to operate within. To this end the software is split
into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the
processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available
and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for
the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages.
1.2.2 System services software
The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay
hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the
relay’s software from the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and
provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via
the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an
interface layer between the control of the relay’s hardware and the rest of the
relay software.
1.2.3 Platform software
The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user
interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of
the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides
direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e.
the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the
platform software converts the information from the database into the format
required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all
settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control
software.
1.2.4 Protection and control software
The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the
protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as
Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the disturbance recorder. The
protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings
changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for
acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital opto-isolated
inputs.
1.2.5 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and
logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses
the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform
software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored
records.
Page 4 of 14
Section 2. HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module

performs a separate function within the relay’s operation. This section describes
the functional operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1 Processor Board
The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor
performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions,
control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation
of the LCD, keypad and LEDs.
The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which
allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the
front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for
RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier
communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel
communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel
85C30 serial communications controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state)
SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software,
and data storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-
volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-
volatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB
of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event ,fault and
maintenance record data, and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of
configuration data, including the present setting values.
2.2 Internal Communication Buses
The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between
different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way
ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in
addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is
driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other
modules within the relay are slaves.
The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the
digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The
DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data
from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
2.3 Input Module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s)
and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module
of P342 consists of two PDBs; the main input board and the transformer board.
This relay provides four voltage inputs and five current inputs. The P343 input
module contains an additional transformer board, providing a total of four
voltage inputs and eight current inputs.
Page 5 of 14
2.3.1 Transformer board

The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and
up to five current transformers (CTs). The auxiliary transformer board adds up to
four more CTs. The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current
(menu and wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either
110V or 440V nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both
to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s
electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the
power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage
transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input
board to reduce noise.
2.3.2 Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for
the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the
CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and
transmits the samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On
the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter
before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A-
D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The
digital input signals are optically isolated on this board to prevent excessive
voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry.
Up to 9 current inputs 4 voltage inputs

Up to 9
CT
CT
VT
VT
4
Transformer board
Input board
Up to 9
single
single
single
single
Diffn
Diffn
Diffn
Diffn
to
to
to
Anti-alias filters
to
4
Up to 9
pass
filter
pass
pass
pass
filter
filter
filter
Low
Low
Low
Low
4
16:1
Multiplexer
Optical
isolator
Noise
filter
Buffer
16-bit
ADC
8 digital inputs
Sample
control
8
8
interface
Calibration
E2 PROM
Serial
Optical
isolator
Noise
filter
Trigger from processor
board
Serial sample
data bus
Parallel bus
Buffer
Parallel bus
Figure 2: Main input board

Page 6 of 14
The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be

sampled. This allows for up to 9 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs to be
accommodated. The 3 spare channels are used to sample 3 different reference
voltages for the purpose of continually checking the operation of the multiplexer
and the accuracy of the A-D converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24
samples per cycle of the power waveform by a logic control circuit which which
is driven by the frequency tracking function on the main processor board. The
calibration E2PROM holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the
processor board to correct for any amplitude or phase error introduced by the
transformers and analogue circuitry.
The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present
on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing.
The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital
input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same
reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relay’s
electronics from the power system environment. A 48V ‘field voltage’ supply is
provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The
input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove
unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data
bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be
accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board
which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main
input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which
are provided on the main input board.
2.4 Power Supply Module (including output relays)
The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit
itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains
the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides
an RS485 communication interface.
2.4.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)
One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to
the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature
of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are
shown in table 1 below.
Nominal dc range Nominal ac range

24/48V dc only
48/125V 30/100 Vrms
110/250V 100/240 Vrms
Table 1: Power supply options
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide
isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three
voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, ±16V
for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the
output relay coils and the RTD board if fitted. All power supply voltages
Page 7 of 14
including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way
ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board
which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of
the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485
interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide
communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103
protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and
provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All
internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via
the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open
and one normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These
are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
2.4.2 Output relay board
The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts
and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power
supply line. The relays’ state is written to or read from using the parallel data
bus. Depending on the relay model, more than seven output contacts may be
provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Each additional
relay board provides a further seven output relays.
2.5 RTD board
The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) board is an order option. It is used
to monitor the temperature readings from up to ten PT100 RTDs which are each
connected using a 3-wire connection. The board is powered from the 22V
power rail that is used to drive the output relays. The RTD board includes two
redundant channels which are connected to high stability resistors to provide
reference readings. These are used to check the operation of the RTD board.
The temperature data is read by the processor via the parallel data bus, and is
used to provide thermal protection of the generator windings.
2.6 IRIG-B Board
The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate
timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is
available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on
the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s
internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for
the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records.
The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver
which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485
electrical connection (IEC60870 only).
2.7 Mechanical Layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has
a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at
all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for
performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a
multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and
minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to
Page 8 of 14
reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module
metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the
digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the
rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B
signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay
for data communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when
the board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD
and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
Section 3. RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of
this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:
• the real-time operating system
• the system services software
• the platform software
• the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and
the protection & control software, which between them control the functional
behaviour of the relay. Figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection & Control

Measurements and event, fault
Software
& disturbance records
Disturbance
recorder task
Protection
Programmable & task
fixed scheme logic
Platform Software
Fourier signal Protection
Event, fault, Remote
processing algorithms
disturbance, communications
maintenance record interface -
logging IEC60870-5-103
Supervisor task
Protection & control settings
Settings Remote
communications
database
interface - Modbus
Sampling function -
copies samples into
2 cycle buffer Control of output contacts and Front panel Local & Remote
programmable LEDs interface - LCD & communications
keypad interface - Courier
Sample data & digital

logic inputs Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD,
LEDs, front & rear comms ports.
Self-checking maintenance records
System services software
Relay hardware
Figure 3: Relay software structure

Page 9 of 14
3.1 Real-time operating system

The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to
schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the
time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also
responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks
through the use of operating system messages.
3.2 System services software
As shown in figure 3, the system services software provides the interface
between the relay’s hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform
software and the protection & control software. For example, the system
services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad
and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor
and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash
EPROM at power up.
3.3 Platform software
The platform software has three main functions:
• to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection
software, including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance
records.
• to store and maintain a database of all of the relay’s settings in non-volatile
memory.
• to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of
the relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and
rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has
been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103).
3.3.1 Record logging
The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and
maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in
battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has
happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250
event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are
maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record.
The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the
platform software.
The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the
platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenace record in the event
of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform
software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the
protection software functions. See also the section on supervision and
idagnostics later in this chapter.
3.3.2 Settings database
The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay,
including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings.
The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform
software’s management of the settings database includes the responsibility of
ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at
any one time. This feature is employed to avoid confusion between different
Page 10 of 14
parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection

settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a
‘scratchpad’ in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be
made in any order but applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder
and saved in the database in E2PROM, at the same time (see also chapter 1
on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task,
the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3 Database interface
The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay’s internal
interface between the database and each of the relay’s user interfaces. The
database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the
relay’s user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform
software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
3.4 Protection & control software
The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the
protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it
has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform
software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the
highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the
fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a
supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the
exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.
3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling
After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until
there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of
samples is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system
services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module
and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes
execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a
certain number. For the P342 and P343 generator protection relays, the
protection task is executed four times per cycle, i.e. after every 6 samples for
the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. However, the
protection elements are split into groups so that different elements are
processed each time, with every element being processed at least once per
cycle. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its
processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other
software tasks to take place.
3.4.2 Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the
opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs
are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a
change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a
cycle before it is registered with the protection & control software.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive
Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by
detecting a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value
of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input
module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the
power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the
Page 11 of 14
protection & control task.

When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it
calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier
components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples
from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this
way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and
produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular
component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the
fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic
frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the
relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate
frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a
sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input
current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed
by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module
are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform
recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for
metering purposes.
3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic
The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user
to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular
application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and
delay timers.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals
from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection
elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection
scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection
schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic
gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and
can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a
programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a
pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the
input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and
the output contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever
any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the
digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the
part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has
occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used
by the PSL. The protection & control software updates the logic delay timers and
checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs.
This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic
design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very
complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through
the PC support package MiCOM S1.
3.4.4 Event, fault & maintenance recording
A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used
to indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection &
Page 12 of 14
control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is
available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM
which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives
either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to
create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the
record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisor’s
buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the
records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when
a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it
is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full before the
platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this
occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task
instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance
record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be
triggered by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to
successfully store a maintenance record, depending on the nature of the
problem. See also the section on self supervision & diagnostics later in this
chapter.
3.4.5 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection &
control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the
values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a
maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the
protection & control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the
data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to
limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in
compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the
analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it
is in a steady-state condition. The compressed disturbance records can be
decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE
format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
Section 4. SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS
The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation

of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if
an error or fault occurs within the relay’s hardware or software, the relay is able
to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-
boot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time
which is indicated by the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the relay being
extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails
to resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service.
Again this will be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to
store a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of
the problem to be notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic
check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and
Page 13 of 14
secondly a continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the

relay’s critical functions whilst it is in service.
4.1 Start-up self-testing
The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few
seconds to complete, during which time the relay’s protection is unavailable.
This is signalled by the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the relay which will
illuminate when the relay has passed all of the tests and entered operation. If
the testing detects a problem, the relay will remain out of service until it is
manually restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
4.1.1 System boot
The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before
the program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for
execution by the processor. When the copy has been completed the data then
held in SRAM is compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two
are the same and that no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash
EPROM to SRAM. The entry point of the software code in SRAM is then called
which is the relay initialisation code.
4.1.2 Initialisation software
The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor
registers and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to
determine whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating
system and creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the
initialisation process the relay checks:
• the status of the battery.
• the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault
and disturbance records.
• the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-
isolated inputs.
• the operation of the LCD controller.
• the watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the
process of starting the platform software.
4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring
In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held
in E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-
B board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of
data; the presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the
analogue data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference
voltage.
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service
and the protection started-up.
Page 14 of 14
4.2 Continuous self-testing

When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical
parts of its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system
services software (see section on relay software earlier in this chapter) and the
results reported to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as
follows:
• the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified
by a checksum.
• the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the
corresponding data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption.
• the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is
verified with a checksum.
• the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum.
• the battery status.
• the level of the field voltage.
• the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and
the relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is
executed. The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is
continuously checked by the acquisition function every time it is executed, by
means of sampling the reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel.
• the operation of the RTD board is checked by reading the temperature
indicated by the reference resistors on the two spare RTD channels.
• the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the
software that reads the time and date from the board.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relay’s
subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a
maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the
battery status, the RTD board or the IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in
operation. However, for problems detected in any other area the relay will
initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds
when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay
including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur. As
described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough
diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to
restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself
permanently out of service. This is indicated by the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of
the relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Technical Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Chapter 4
Technical Data
Contents
1. RATINGS 1
1.1 Currents 1
1.2 Voltages 1
1.3 Auxiliary voltage 1
1.4 Frequency 2
1.5 Logic inputs 2
1.6 Output relay contacts 2
1.7 Field voltage 2
1.8 Loop through connections 3
1.9 Wiring requirements 3
2. BURDENS 3
2.1 Current circuit 3
2.2 Voltage circuit 3
2.3 Auxiliary supply 3
2.4 Optically-isolated inputs 3
3. ACCURACY 4
3.1 Reference conditions 4
3.2 Measurement accuracy 4
3.3 Protection accuracy 5
3.4 Influencing quantities 7
3.5 High voltage withstand IEC 60255-5: 1977 7
3.5.1 Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5: 1997 rear terminal only 7
3.5.2 Impulse 7
3.5.3 Insulation resistance 8
4. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE 8
4.1 Electrical environment 8
4.1.1 DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979 8
4.1.2 AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11:1979 8
4.1.3 Disturbances on AC supply - EN 61000-4-11:1994 8
4.1.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1998 8
4.1.5 Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 and IEC 60801-4:1988 8
4.1.6 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1989 and IEC 60801-2:1991 8
4.1.7 Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991 9
4.1.8 Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991 9
4.1.9 Radiated immunity IEC 60255-22-3:1989 and IEC 60801-3:1984 9
4.1.10 Conducted immunity EN 50141:1993 9
4.1.11 Surge immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995 9
4.1.12 EMC compliance 9
4.1.13 Power frequency interference - Electricity Association (UK) 9
4.2 Atmospheric environment 10
4.2.1 Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988 10
4.2.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969 10
4.2.3 Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989 10
4.2.4 Pollution degree IEC 61010-1: 1990 10
4.3 Mechanical environment 10
4.3.1 Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 10
4.3.2 Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 10
4.3.3 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 10
5. ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS 10
5.1 ANSI/ IEEE C37.9: 1989 10
Contents
5.2 ANSI /IEEE C37.90.1: 1989 10

5.3 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2: 1995 10
6. SAFETY 11
6.1 Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive 11
7. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES 11
7.1 Generator differential protection (87G) (P343) 11
7.1.1 Setting ranges 11
7.1.2 Time delay settings 11
7.2 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51) 11
7.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance) 13
7.3.1 SBEF and SET time delay characteristics 13
7.4 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N) 13
7.5 Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N) 14
7.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N) 14
7.7 Earth fault protection of Petersen coil earthed systems 15
7.8 100% stator earth fault (P343) 15
7.9 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) 15
7.10 Under impedance (21) 16
7.11 Under voltage (27) 16
7.11.1 Level settings 16
7.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics 16
7.12 Over voltage 17
7.12.1 Level settings 17
7.12.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics 17
7.13 Under frequency (81U) 18
7.14 Over frequency (81O) 18
7.15 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R/32L/32O) 18
7.16 Field failure (40) 19
7.17 Negative phase sequence thermal (46) 19
7.18 Volts/Hz (24) 20
7.19 Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) (P343) 20
7.20 Voltage transformer supervision 20
7.21 Resistive temperature detectors 21
7.22 Nominal frequency 21
7.23 Breaker fail timers (TBF1 and TBF2) 21
8. CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS 22
8.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring 22
8.2 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 22
8.2.1 Maintenance alarm settings 22
8.2.2 Lock-out alarm settings 22
9. INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES 22
9.1 CT and VT ratio settings 22
Page 1 of 22
Section 1. RATINGS
1.1 Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms.
Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral
input of each winding sharing one terminal.
CT Type Operating range

Standard 0 to 64In
Sensitive 0 to 2In
Duration Withstand
Continuous rating 4In
10 seconds 30In
1 second 100In
1.2 Voltages
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms.
Nominal Voltage Short term above Vn
100 - 120V ph-ph rms 0 to 200V ph-ph rms
380 - 480V ph-ph rms 0 to 800V ph-ph rms
Duration Withstand Withstand

(Vn = 100/120V) (Vn = 380/480V)
Continuous rating (2Vn) 240Vph - ph rms 880Vph - ph rms
10 seconds (2.6Vn) 312Vph - ph rms 1144Vph - ph rms
1.3 Auxiliary voltage
The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in
the table below:
Nominal Ranges Operative dc Operative ac
range range
24 - 48V dc 19 to 65V -
48 - 110V dc (30 - 100 V ac rms) ** 37 to 150V 24 to 110V
110 - 250V dc 87 to 300V 80 to 265V
(100 - 240V ac rms) **
** rated for AC or DC operation.
Page 2 of 22
1.4 Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 - 60Hz, the operate range is
45Hz - 65Hz.
1.5 Logic inputs

All the logic inputs are independent and isolated, relay type P342 provide 8
inputs, 16 inputs are provided by the P343.
Rating Range
Logical “off” 0V dc 0 to 12V dc
Logical “on” 50V dc 25 to 60V dc
Higher voltages can be used in conjunction with an external resistor, value of
the resistor is determined by the following equation:
Resistor = (Required input level - 50) x 200Ω
1.6 Output relay contacts
Make & carry 30A for 3s

Carry 250A for 30ms
5A continuous
Break dc: 50W resistive
dc: 25W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 1250VA
ac: 1250VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)
Maxima: 5A and 300V
Loaded contact: 10,000 operation minimum
Unloaded contact: 100,000 operations minimum
Watchdog
Contact
Break dc: 30W resistive
dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
The maximum number of output relays that should be configured to be
permenantly energised is 50% of those available (minimum 4).
1.7 Field voltage

The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit
of 112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at
<35V.
Page 3 of 22
1.8 Loop through connections

Terminals D17 - D18 and F17 - F18 are internally connected together for
convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V.
1.9 Wiring requirements
The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are
detailed in the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2 Chapter 2).
Section 2. BURDENS
2.1 Current circuit
CT burden (at nominal current)

1A <0.1 Ω
5A <0.02 Ω
2.2 Voltage circuit
Reference voltage (Vn)

Vn = 100 - 120V <0.02VA rms at 110V
Vn = 380 - 480V <0.1VA rms at 440V
2.3 Auxiliary supply
Case size Nominal* Maximum**

Size 8 15W 20W
Size 12 18W 30W
* Nominal is with 50% of the optos energised and one relay per card
energised
** Maximum is with all optos and all relays energised.
2.4 Optically-isolated inputs
DC Supply 5mA burden per input. (Current drawn at minimum voltage).
2.5mA at minimum voltage (30V).
Page 4 of 22
Section 3. ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is ±2.5% unless otherwise

specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified
accuracy is valid over the full setting range.
3.1 Reference conditions
Quantity Reference conditions Test tolerance

General
Ambient temperature 20 °C ±2°C
Atmospheric pressure 86kPa to 106kPa -
Relative humidity 45 to 75 % -
Input energising quantity
Current In ±5%
Voltage Vn ±5%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±0.5%
Auxiliary supply DC 48V or 110V
AC 63.5V or 110V ±5%
Settings Reference value

Time multiplier setting 1.0
Time dial 10
Phase angle 0°
3.2 Measurement accuracy
Quantity Range Accuracy

Current 1.0 In ±1%
Voltage 1.0 Vn ±1%
Frequency 5 - 70Hz ±0.025Hz
Phase 0 - 360° ±2%
3.3
Element Range Trigger Reset Time Accuracy
Generator differential protection Is1 _ +5% 0.95 Is Instantaneous £30ms

bias characteristic +10% + 10%
2 to 20 Is [1] DT: Is+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms

Phase overcurrent elements (I> & I>>) 0.95 Is + 5% IDMT +5% or 40ms
TECHNICAL GUIDE
IDMT: 1.05 Is+5%

MiCOM P342, P343
Accuracy:
Relay characteristic angle - 95° to + 95° 1° Greater of +2% or 20ms
+2°
DT: Is+5% 0.95 Is + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
2 to 20 Is [1]
Protection accuracy
Earth fault measuring elements (IN >, IREF>) IDMT: 1.05 Is+5% IDMT +5% or 40ms
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS
DT: Is+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms

Earth fault measuring elements (ISEF>) 2 to 20 Is [2] 0.95 Is + 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Is+5% IDMT +5% or 40ms
Zero sequence voltage polarisation (Vop>)
0.5 - 25V Accuracy: _ _
Vn = 100/120 V
2.0 - 100V +10% at RCA +90°
Vn = 380/440 V
Negative sequence polarisation:
Voltage threshold (V2p>) 0.5 - 25V Accuracy: _ _
Vn = 100/120 V 2.0 - 100V +2°
Vn = 380/440 V
Negative sequence polarisation: Accuracy: _
0.08 - 1.0 In 0.95 Is + 5%
Voltage threshold (V2p>) +2°
100% stator earth fault (3VN3H >) _ +5% 1.05%Vs +5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Accuracy: Above setting: 10ms or less
Under Current elements (I<, I0<) 0.2 - 1.2 In +5%
+2° Below setting: 15ms or less
_ DT: Is+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Voltage dependent overcurrent 0.95 Is + 5%
IDMT: 1.05 Is+5% IDMT +5% or 40ms
Chapter 4
Page 5 of 22
TG8614A
Volume 1
Under impedance (Z<) _ Zs +5% 0.95 Is + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms

Under voltage elements (V<)
10 - 120V DT: Is+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Vn = 100/120 V 1.05Vs + 5% IDMTf +5% or 40ms
40 - 440V IDMT: 0.95Vs+5%
Vn = 380/440 V
Over voltage elements (V>&V>>) DT: Is+5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
60 - 185V
Vn = 100/120 V IDMT: 1.05Vs+5% 0.95Vs + 10% IDMT +5% or 40ms
360 - 680V
Vn = 380/440 V
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MiCOM P342, P343
Under/over frequency _ < +0.025 Hz Greater of +2% or 50ms

Reverse power (-P>), over power (P>) _ +5% 0.95 + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Field failure _ +5% 0.95 + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Negative phase sequence thermal +5% 0.95 + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
(I2>, I2>>)
Volts / Hz _ +5% 0.95 + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Rate of change of frequency _ To be determined Greater of +2% or 50ms
Voltage vector shift _ +1°
Unintentional energisation at standstill +5% 0.95 + 5%
_ Greater of +2% or 50ms
(I>) (V>) +5% 1.05 +5%
Residual over voltage elements DT: Is+5%
1 - 50V 0.95Vs + 5% Greater of +2% or 50ms
Vn = 100/120 V IDMT: 1.05Vs+5% IDMT +5% or 40ms
4 - 200V
Vn = 380/440 V
Directional operating boudary 0 -360° Accuracy: +2° _ Greater of +2% or 50ms
Transient overreach 2 to 20 Is [1] <5% (for a system _ _
X/R of up to 90)
Realy overshoot 2 to 20 Is [1] <50ms _ _
0 to 10s _ _ Greater of +2% or 50ms

Breaker fail timers
Temperature protection _ _
1°
[1] or 16 In, whichever is the smaller
Chapter 4
Page 6 of 22
Volume 1
TG8614A
[2] or 2 In, whichever is the smaller

Page 7 of 22
3.4 Influencing quantities

No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing
quantities:
Quantity Operative range (typical only)

Environmental
Temperature -25°C to +55°C
Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, According to
Bump, Seismic) IEC 60255-21-1:1988
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-3:1995
Quantity Operative range
Electrical
Frequency 5 Hz to 70 Hz
Harmonics (single) 5% over the range 2nd to 17th
Auxiliary voltage range 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac)
Aux. supply ripple 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn
Point on wave of fault waveform 0 to 360°
DC offset of fault waveform No offset to fully offset
Phase angle -90° to + 90°
Magnetising inrush No operation with OC elements set to 35%
of peak anticipated inrush level.
3.5 High voltage withstand IEC60255-5:1977

3.5.1 Dielectric withstand IEC60255-5:1997 Rear terminals only
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit
grouped together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and
loop through connections D17/D18 and F17/F18.
1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output
relays.
1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and
watchdog output relays.
3.5.2 Impulse
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs,
0.5J across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent
circuit connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected
together.
Page 8 of 22
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.

3.5.3 Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance is greater than 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.
Section 4. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
The product complies with the following specifications:

4.1 Electrical environment
4.1.1 DC supply interruptions IEC 60255-11:1979
The product will withstand a 20ms interruption in the auxiliary voltage in its
quiescent condition without de-energisation.
4.1.2 AC ripple on DC Supply IEC 60255-11:1979
The product will operate with 12% AC ripple on the DC auxiliary supply without
any additional measurement errors.
4.1.3 Disturbances on AC supply - EN61000-4-11 :1994
The products satisfies the requirements of EN61000-4-11 for voltage dips and
short interruptions of 20ms.
4.1.4 High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988
The product complies with Class III 2.5kV common mode and 1kV differential
mode for 2 seconds at 1MHz with 200Ω source impedance, without any mal-
operations or additional measurement errors.
4.1.5 Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4:1992 & IEC 60801-4:1988
The product complies with all classes up to and including class IV/ 4kV without
any mal-operations or additional measurement errors.
Fast transient disturbances on power 4kV, 5ns rise time, 50 ns decay time,
supply (common mode only) 5kHz repetition time, 15 ms burst,
repeated every 300ms for 1 min in
each polarity, with a 50Ω source
impedance.
Fast transient disturbances on I/O 2kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time,
signal, data and control lines 5kHz repetition time, 15ms burst,
(common mode only) repeated every 300ms for 1min in
each polarity, with a 50Ω source
impedance.
4.1.6 Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2:1996

The product will withstand application of all discharge levels up to the following
without mal-operation:
Class IV – 15kV discharge in air to the user interface, display and
exposed metal work.
Page 9 of 22
Class III – 8kV discharge in air to all communication ports.

Level 3 – 6kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the
product without any mal-operations.
4.1.7 Conducted emissions EN 55011:1991
Group 1 Class A limits.
0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBµV (quasi peak) 66dΒµV (average).
0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBµV (quasi peak) 60dΒµV (average).
4.1.8 Radiated emissions EN 55011:1991
Group 1 Class A limits.
30 - 230MHz, 40dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance.
230 - 1000MHz, 47dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance.
4.1.9 Radiated immunity C37.90.2:1995
25MHz to 1000MHz, zero and 100% square wave modulated. Field strength
of 35V/m.
4.1.10 Conducted immunity EN50141:1993
Class III - 10Vrms @ 1kHz 80% am.- 0.15 to 80MHz.
4.1.11 Surge immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995
Class IV - 4kV peak, 1.2/50µs between all groups and case earth.
- 2kV peak, 1.2/5.0µs between terminal of each group.
4.1.12 EMC compliance
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC is
claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
Generic Standards EN 50081-2 :1994 and EN 50082-2 :1995 are used to
establish conformity.
4.1.13 Power frequency interference - Electricity Association (UK)
EA PAP Document, Environmental Test Requirements for Protection Relays and
Systems Issue I, Draft 4.2.1 1995.
Class Length of comms circuit Unbalanced Balanced comms Balanced comms

comms Vrms (Unbalance 1%) (Unbalance 0.1%)
Vrms Vrms
1 1 to 10 metres 0.5 0.005 0.0005
2 10 to 100 metres 5 0.05 0.005
3 100 to 1000 metres 50 0.5 0.05
4 1000 to 10,000m or > 500 5 0.5

Page 10 of 22
4.2 Atmospheric environment

4.2.1 Temperature IEC 60255-6:1988
Storage and transit –25°C to +70°C.
Operating –25°C to +55°C.
IEC60068-2-1:1990 Cold
IEC60068-2-2: 1974 Dry heat
4.2.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3:1969
56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40°C.
4.2.3 Enclosure protection IEC 60529:1989
IP52 - Protected against dust and dripping water at 15° to the vertical.
4.2.4 Pollution degree IEC 61010-1:1990
Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, a tempory
conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
4.3 Mechanical environment
4.3.1 Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Vibration response Class 2 - 1g
Vibration endurance Class 2 - 2g.
4.3.2 Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Shock response Class 2 - 10g
Shock withstand Class 1 - 15g
Bump Class 1 - 10g
4.3.3 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Class 2.
Section 5. ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS
The products meet the ANSI/IEEE requirements as follows :-

5.1 ANSI / IEEE C37.9: 1989
Standards for relays and relay systems associated with electric power
apparatus.
5.2 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989
Surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems :-
Oscillatory test - 1MHz to 1.5MHz, 2.5kV to 3.0kV,
Fast transient test 4kV to 5kV
5.3 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995
Standard for withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic
interference from transceivers. 35V/m , 25 to 1000MHz.
Page 11 of 22
Section 6. SAFETY
6.1 Low voltage (safety and insulation) directive

The product shall be compliant with the low voltage (safety/insulation) directive
EN61010-1:1993.
Products are reviewed for compliance to the LV Directive.
Section 7. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
7.1 Generator differential protection (87G) {P343}

7.1.1 Setting ranges
Settings Range Step size
Mode Percentage bias / high impedance
Is1 0.05In - 0.5In 0.01In
k1 0 - 20% 5%
Is2 1In - 5In 0.1In
k2 20 - 150% 10%
7.1.2 Time delay settings

Instantaneous
7.2 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51)

1st stage
I>1 0.08 - 4 In 0.01 In
Characteristic DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC),
MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE), Inv(US), STI(US)
DT 0 to 100s 0.01 In
TMS (IEC/UK) 0.025 to 1.2 0.025
tRESET (IEC/UK) 0 to 100s 0.01s
2nd stage
I>2 0.08 - 10 In 0.01 In
DT 0 to 100s 0.01s
Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic

IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/
US curves as shown in the table below.
Page 12 of 22
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
t=TX K +L
a
(I /Is ) - 1
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
TD K +L
t= X a
7 (I /Is ) - 1
Where t = operation time

K = constant
I = measured current
IS = current threshold setting
α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
T = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT characteristics
IDMT Curve K α L
description Standard Constant Constant Constant
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse UK 120 1 0
Moderately inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Inverse US-C08 5.95 2 0.18
Short time inverse US-C02 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves
Setting Range Step Size

TMS 0.025 to 1.2 0.025
Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves

Setting Range Step Size
TD 0.5 to 15 0.1
Page 13 of 22
7.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance)
Setting Range Step size

K1 0 % to 20 % 1 % (minimum)
K2 0 % to 150 % 1 % (minimum)
Is1 0.05 In to In 0.01 In
Is2 0.1 In to 1.5 In 0.1 In
7.3.1 SBEF and SEF time delay characteristics

The earth-fault measuring elements for SBEF and SEF shall be followed by an
independently seletable time delay. These time delays have an extended
range of 0 to 200s, but are otherwise identical to those of the phase
overcurrent definite time delay. The reset time delay is the same as the phase
overcurrent reset time.
7.4 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N)
1st stage
I >1 0.02 - 1.0 In 0.01 In

N
2nd stage
I >2 0.02 - 10 In 0.01 In

N

1st stage
Characteristic DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC),
MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE), Inv(US),
STI(US)
DT 0 to 200s 0.01 In
TMS (IEC/UK) 0.025 to 1.2 0.025
tRESET (IEC/UK) 0 to 100s 0.01s
2nd stage
DT 0 to 200s 0.01s
Page 14 of 22
7.5 Neutral displacement / residual overvoltage (59N)

Name Range Step Size
VN> (Vn 100/120V) 1 - 50V 1V
VN>> (Vn 100/120V) 1 - 50V 1V
VN> (Vn 380/440V) 4 - 200V 4V
VN>> (Vn 380/440V) 4 - 200V 4V

The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t= K
(M - 1)
Where, K = Time multiplier setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage / relay setting voltage (Vs)
Range Step Size
TMS setting (K) 0.5 - 100s 0.5
DT reset setting 0 - 100s 0.01s
Definite time and TMS setting ranges
7.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N)

Directionality Always forward
IN> 0.005 to 0.1 In 0.00025 In
VN > 0.5 to 22V (for Vn=100/120V) 0.5V
2 to 88V (for Vn =380/440V) 2V
RCA -95° to 95° 1°
DT 0 to 200s 0.01s
Page 15 of 22
7.7 Earth fault protection of Petersen Coil earthed systems
Name Range Step size

P N> 0 - 20W (Rating = 1A, 100/120V) 0.05W
0 - 100W (Rating = 5A, 100/120V) 0.25W
0 - 80W (Rating = 1A, 380/440V) 0.20W
7.8 100% Stator earth fault {P343}

Third harmonic neutral 0.3 - 20V (for Vn=100/120V) 0.1V
under voltage (VN3H<) 1.2 - 80V (for Vn /440V) 0.4V
Under voltage inhibit 30 - 120V (for Vn=100/120V) 1V
120 - 480V (for Vn=380/440V) 4V
t 0 - 100s 0.01s
7.9 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V)

Operating mode Voltage controlled/voltage
restrained
Current threshold Is 0.8 - 4 In 0.01 In
Vs (for voltage controlled) 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 1V
80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 4V
Vs1 (for voltage restrained) 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 1V
80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 4V
Vs2 (for voltage restrained) 20 - 120V (for Vn = 100/120V) 1V
80 - 440V (for Vn = 380/440V) 4V
K factor 0.25 - 1.00 0.05
DT 0 -100s 0.01s
TMS 0.025 - 1.2 0.025
tRESET 0 - 100s 0.01s
Timer accuracy should be <2% (or 50ms whichever is greater).

Page 16 of 22
7.10 Under impedance (21)

Z< 2 - 120 W (for Vn=100/120V, In=1A) 0.5W
0.4 - 24 W (for Vn=100/120V, In=5A) 0.1W
8 - 480 W (for Vn=380/440V, In=1A) 2W
1.6 - 96 W (for Vn=380/440V, In=5A) 0.4W
DT 0 - 100s 0.1s
7.11 Under voltage (27)

7.11.1 Level settings
Vph - N<1 & Vph - ph<1
(Vn = 100/120V) 10 - 120V 1V
(Vn = 380/440V) 40 - 480V 4V
(Vn = 100/120V) 10 - 120V 1V
(Vn = 380/440V) 40 - 480V 4V
7.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics

Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable
time delay.
The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse
Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite
Time delay setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the
operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
t= K
(1 - M)
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
Page 17 of 22
Range Step size

DT setting 0 - 100s 0.1s
TMS Setting (K) 0.5 - 100 0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges.

Timer accuracy should be <2% (or 50ms whichever is greater).
7.12 Over voltage (59)
7.12.1 Level settings
Name Range Step Size
Vph - N>1 & Vph - ph>1
(Vn = 100/120V) 60 - 185V 1V
(Vn = 380/440V) 240 - 740V 4V
(Vn = 100/120V) 60 - 185V 1V
(Vn = 380/440V) 240 - 740V 4V
7.12.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics

Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable
time delay.
The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse
Time or Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite
Time delay setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the
operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula :
t= K
(M - 1)
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)
Page 18 of 22
Range Step size

DT setting 0 - 100s 0.1s
TMS Setting (K) 0.5 - 100s 0.5
Definite time and TMS setting ranges

7.13 Under frequency (81U)

f (for all stages) 45 - 65 Hz 0.025 Hz
t (for all stages) 0 - 100s 0.1s
7.14 Over frequency (81O)

f (for all stages) 45 - 65 Hz 0.025 Hz
t (for all stages) 0 - 100s 0.1s
7.15 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Stage 1 Enable/disable
Mode Reverse/low forward/over
-P> (reverse power) 4W - 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
16W - 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 2W
70W - 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
280W - 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) 6W
P< (low forward
power) 4W - 40W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
16W - 160W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 2W
70W - 200W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
280W - 800W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) 6W
P> (over power) 4W - 300W (In=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
16W - 1200W (In=1A, Vn=400/440V) 2W
70W - 1500W (In=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
280W - 6000W (In=5A, Vn=400/440V) 6W
DT 0 - 100s 0.1s
DO Timer 0 - 10s 0.1s
Stage 2 Same as Stage 1
Page 19 of 22
7.16 Field failure (40)

Mho characteristic settings (secondary ohms) for Vn = 100/120V:
Settings Range Steps
Mho offset (-Xa1, -Xa2) 0 - 40 Ω (for In = 1A) 0.5Ω
0 - 8Ω (for In = 5A) 0.1Ω
Diameter (Xb1, Xb2) 25 - 325Ω (for In = 1A) 1Ω
5 - 65Ω (for In = 5A) 0.2Ω
t1, t2 0 - 100s 0.1s
tDO1, tDO2 0 - 10s 0.1s
Linear characteristic 0 - 100s 0.1s
alarm time (t)
Mho characteristic settings (secondary ohms) for Vn = 380/440V:

Mho offset -Xa 0 - 160 Ω (for In = 1A) 2Ω
0 - 32Ω (for In = 5A) 0.4Ω
Diameter Xb 100 - 1300 Ω (for In = 1A) 4Ω
20 - 260 Ω (for In = 5A) 0.8Ω
Linear characteristic settings:

Φ 15 - 75
0 0
10
7.17 Negative phase sequence thermal (46)

Alarm status Enable/disable
I2> (alarm) 0.03 - 0.5 In 0.01 In
t> 0 - 60s 0.1s
Trip status Enable/disable
I2>> (trip) 0.05 - 0.5 In 0.01 In
K 2 - 40s 0.1s
Kreset 2 - 40s 0.1s
tmax 500 - 2000s 10s
tmin 0.25 - 40s 0.25s
Page 20 of 22
7.18 Volts/Hz (24)

V/f (trip) 1.5 - 3.5 V/Hz (for Vn=100/120V) 0.01 V/Hz
6.0 - 14 V/Hz (for Vn=380/440V) 0.04 V/Hz
V/f (alarm) 1.5 - 3.5 V/Hz (for Vn=100/120V) 0.01 V/Hz
6.0 - 14 V/Hz (for Vn=380/440V) 0.04 V/Hz
Operating
mode Standard inverse/definite time
TMS (trip) 1 - 63 1
DT (trip) 0 - 100s 0.1s
DT (alarm) 0 - 100s 0.1s
Note: V/Hz setting refers to secondary voltage and the nominal frequency.
7.19 Unintentional energisation at standstill (Dead machine) {P343}

I> 0.08 to 4 In 0.1 In
Vph-ph< 30 to 120V (for Vn=100/120V) 0.01V
120 to 440V (for Vn=400/440V) 0.04V
tPU 0 to 10s 0.1s
tDO 0 to 10s 0.1s
7.20 Voltage transformer supervision

Voltage threshold (V2) 10V (100/120V) Fixed
40V (380/440V)
Phase overvoltage P.U. 30V, D.O. 10V Fixed
(100/120V) P.U.120V,
D.O.40V (380/440V)
Phase overcurrent 0.08 In to 32 In (Model 1)
0.08 In to 10 In (Models 2&3) 0.01 In
Superimposed current 0.1 In Fixed
Current threshold (I2) 0.1 In Fixed
Timer 1.0 - 10s 0.1s
Page 21 of 22
7.21 Resistive temperature detectors
Setting Min Max Step

RTD# alarm temperature (T# alarm) 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD# trip temperature (T# trip) 0°C 200°C 1°C
Temperature time delay (tT# alarm) 0s 100 s 1s
Temperature time delay (tT# trip) 0s 100 s 1s
7.22 Nominal frequency
Setting Range Step size

Frequency 50 to 60Hz 10Hz
7.23 Breaker fail timers (TBF1 and TBF2)

These timers can be enabled or disabled via a setting.
Timer Setting range Step

tBF1 0 to 10 seconds 0.01
tBF2 0 to 10 seconds 0.01
The timers are reset by:

undercurrent elements operating, or
initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or
circuit breaker open auxiliary contact. (if current operation / external device
is not applicable)
Page 22 of 22
Section 8. CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS
8.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring shall be based on the monitoring of
discrepancy between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s,
then the trip circuit alarm shall be indicated.
8.2 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
8.2.1 Maintenance alarm settings

Operation threshold 1- 10000 1
I threshold
x
1000 - 2.5 x 10 12
1000
t threshold 5 - 500ms 1ms
8.2.2 Lock-out alarm settings

Operation threshold 1- 10000 1
Ix threshold 1000 - 2.5 x 1012 1000
t threshold 5 - 500ms 1ms
Section 9. INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES
9.1 CT and VT ratio settings
Primary range Secondary range

Current transformer 1 - 30000 Amps 1 A 1 or 5 Amps
step size
Voltage transformer 100 V - 1000 kV 1V 100 - 440 V
step size
Technical Guide
Chapter 5
SCADA Communications
GENAERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Chapter 5
Contents
Page 1of 1
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 COURIER INTERFACE 1
2.1 Courier protcol 1
2.2 Front courier port 2
2.3 Supported command set 2
2.4 Relay courier database 3
2.5 Setting changes 3
2.5.1 Method 1 3
2.5.2 Method 2 4
2.5.3 Relay settings 4
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode 4
2.6 Event extraction 4
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction 5
2.6.2 Event types 5
2.6.3 Event format 5
2.6.4 Manual event record extraction 6
2.7 Disturbance record extraction 6
2.8 Programmable logic settings 7
3 MODBUS INTERFACE 7
3.1 Communication link 7
3.2 Modbus function 7
3.3 Response codes 8
3.4 Register mapping 8
3.5 Event extraction 9
3.5.1 Manual selection 9
3.5.2 Automatic extraction 9
3.5.3 Record data 9
3.6 Disturbance record extraction 10
3.6.1 Manual selection 10
3.6.2 Automatic extraction 10
3.6.3 Record data 10
3.7 Setting changes 11
3.7.1 Password protection 11
3.7.2 Control and support setting 11
3.7.3 Protection and disturbance recorder settings 11
4 IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 12
4.1 Physical connection and link layer 12
4.2 Initialisation 12
4.3 Time synchronisation 13
4.4 Spontaneous events 13
4.5 General interrogation 13
4.6 Cyclic measurements 14
4.7 Commands 14
4.8 Test mode 14
4.9 Disturbance records 14
4.10 Blocking of monitor direction 14
Page 1 of 14
Section 1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough
detail to allow integration within a substation communication network. As has
been outlined in earlier chapters the relay supports a choice of one of three
protocols via the rear communication interface. This is in addition to the front
serial interface which supports the Courier protocol.
The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that
up to 32 relays can be ‘daisy chained’ together using a simple twisted pair
electrical connection.
For each of the three protocol options the supported functions/commands will
be listed together with the database definition. The operation of standard
procedures such as extraction of event, fault and disturbance records or setting
changes will also be described.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this chapter do not
aim to fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol
should be referred to for this information. This chapter serves to describe the
specific implementation of the protocol on the relay.
Section 2. COURIER INTERFACE
2.1 Courier protocol

Courier is an ALSTOM Protection and Control communication protocol. The
concept of the protocol is that a standard set of commands are used to access
a database of settings/data within the relay. This allows a generic master to be
able to communicate with different slave devices. The application specific
aspects are contained, i.e. the master station does not need to be pre-
configured. Within the database itself rather than the commands used to
interrogate it.
The same protocol can be used via two physical links K-Bus or RS232; K-Bus is
based on RS485 voltage levels and is synchronous, the RS232 interface uses
IEC60870 FT1.2 (IEC60870) frame format. The relay supports an IEC60870
connection on the front, for one to one connection, this is not suitable for
permanent connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate, 11 bit frame and
a fixed device address. The rear RS485 interface is used to provide a
permanent connection for K-Bus and allows multi-drop connection. It should be
noted that although K-Bus is based on RS485 voltage levels it is a synchronous
protocol using FM0 encoding. It is not possible to use a standard RS232 to
RS485 converter to convert IEC60870 to K-Bus.
The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of
the Courier protocol, command set and link description.
R6509 K-Bus Interface Guide
R6510 IEC60870 Interface Guide
R6511 Courier Protocol
R6512 Courier User Guide
Page 2 of 14
2.2 Front courier port

The front RS232 port supports the Courier protocol for one to one
communication. It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/
maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. Since this interface
will not be used to link the relay to a substation communication system some of
the features of Courier are not implemented. These are as follows:
Automatic extraction of Event Records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag
Sent Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented
Automatic extraction of Disturbance records:
Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag
Busy Response Layer:
Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a
request will be the final data
Fixed Address:
The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address
command is not supported.
It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance
records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front
port.
2.3 Supported command set
The following Courier commands are supported by the relay:
Protocol Layer
Reset Remote Link
Poll Status
Poll Buffer*
Low Level Commands
Send Event*
Accept Event*
Send Block
Store Block Identifier
Store Block Footer
Menu Browsing
Get Column Headings
Get Column Text
Get Column Values
Get Strings
Get Text
Get Value
Get Column Setting Limits
Page 3 of 14
Setting Changes
Enter Setting Mode
Preload Setting
Abort Setting
Execute Setting
Reset Menu Cell
Set Value
Control Commands
Select Setting Group
Change Device Address*
Set Real Time
Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front Courier
port.
2.4 Relay courier database
The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the
database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column
and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are
specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02.
Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the
column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column.
Appendix A contains the complete database definition for the relay for each
cell location the following information is stated:
• Cell Text
• Cell Datatype
• Cell value
• Whether if the cell is settable, if so
• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Step size
• Password Level required to allow setting changes
• String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)
2.5 Setting changes
(See Courier User Guide Chapter 9)
Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are
supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the
settings within the relay database.
2.5.1 Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure
Page 4 of 14
that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not
checked by this action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a
positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error
response will be returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the
setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made.
However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three
commands are required for each change.
2.5.2 Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response
to this command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate
the nature of a failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more
rapidly then the previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the
relay. This method is most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM
S1.
2.5.3 Relay settings
There are three categories of settings within the relay database
• Control and Support
• Disturbance Recorder
• Protection Settings Group
Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented
immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Settings made to either the
Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in
scratchpad memory only and are not immediately implemented by the relay.
To action setting changes made to these areas of the relay database the Save
Changes cell in the Configuration column must be written to. This allows the
changes to either be confirmed and stored within non-volatile memory or the
setting changes to be aborted.
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode
If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell
within the Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location
BF03) when set to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes
made with the relay set in this mode are stored in scratchpad memory
(including control and support settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to
0 any setting changes are confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory.
2.6 Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either
Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential
order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance
data if appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events,faults
or maintenance data at random from the stored records.
Page 5 of 14
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction

(See Chapter X Courier User Guide)
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information
as it is produced, it is only supported via the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status
byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The
oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event
command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a
Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and
maintenance records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used
to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be
extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as
before.
2.6.2 Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
• Change of state of output contact
• Change of state of opto input
• Protection element operation
• Alarm condition
• Setting Change
• Password entered/timed-out
• Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
• Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
2.6.3 Event format
The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the
relay:
• Cell Reference
• Timestamp
• Cell Text
• Cell Value
Appendix B contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates
how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and
Maintenance records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the
above fields together with two additional fields:
• Event extraction column
• Event number
These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay
using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column
contains a setting which allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected.
Page 6 of 14
This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record,
the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and
data from the column.
2.6.4 Manual event record extraction
Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault and
maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of
the record selected. It is possible to select by event number, or to directly select
a fault record or maintenance record.
Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to
249 to select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most
recent record; 249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records (Type 0)
cells 0102 to 0105 contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent
each of the event fields. If the event selected is a fault or maintenance record
(Type 3) then the remainder of the column will contain the additional
information.
Fault Record Selection (Row 05) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault
record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault
records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will
then contain the details of the fault record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) - This cell can be used to select a
maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar
way to the fault record selection.
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from
the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a
new event or fault occurs.
2.7 Disturbance record extraction
The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed
format via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4, it
should be noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance
records are not supported.
Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to
be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will
be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent
records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit
of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted
disturbance records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of
the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be
extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted
that the file extracted from the relay is in a compressed format, it will be
necessary to use MiCOM S1 to de-compress this file and save the disturbance
record in the COMTRADE format.
As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier
port does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data
can be extracted manually from this port.
Page 7 of 14
2.8 Programmable logic settings

The programmable logic settings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the
relay using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12 of the Courier
User Guide. The following cells are used to perform the extraction
• B204 Domain: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL
configuration data (Upload only)
• B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be
uploaded/downloaded.
• B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to
be downloaded with the relay.
• B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process
• B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download.
The Programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to
and from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings
MiCOM S1 must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also
performs checks on the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to
the relay.
Section 3. MODBUS INTERFACE
The Modbus interface is a master/slave protocol, it is defined by MODICON

Inc by the following document:
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
3.1 Communication link
This interface also uses the rear RS485 port for communication using RTU mode
communication rather than ASCII mode as this provides more efficient use of
the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined in page
7 of the Modbus Guide.
The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front
panel interface or the front Courier port:
Baud Rate
Device Address
Parity
Inactivity Time
3.2 Modbus functions
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the relay:
01 Read Coil Status
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
06 Preset Single Register
08 Diagnostics
Page 8 of 14
11 Fetch Communication Event Counter

12 Fetch Communication Event Log
16 Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way:
01 Read status of output contacts (1xxxx addresses)
02 Read status of opto inputs (2xxxx addresses)
03 Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses)
04 Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses)
06 Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses)
16 Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
3.3 Response codes
Code Modbus Description MiCOM Interpretation
01 Illegal Function Code The function code transmitted is not
supported by the slave
02 Illegal Data Address The start data address in the request is not
an allowable value. If any of the cells in
the range to be written to cannot be
accessed due to password protection then
all changes within the request are
discarded and this error response will be
returned. Note: If the start address is
correct but the range includes non -
implemented addresses this response is
not produced
03 Illegal Value A value referenced in the data field
transmitted by the master is not within
range. Other values transmitted within the
same packet will be executed if inside
range.
06 Slave Device Busy The write command cannot be
implemented due to the database being
locked by another interface. This response
is also produced if the relay software is
busy executing a previous request.
3.4 Register mapping

The relay supports the following memory page references:-
Memory Page Interpretation
0xxxx Read and write access of the Output Relays.
1xxxx Read only access of the Opto Inputs.
3xxxx Read only access of Data.
4xxxx Read and write access of Settings.
Page 9 of 14
where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999).

Note that the “extended memory file” (6xxxx) is not supported.
A complete map of the Modbus addresses supported by the relay is contained
in Appendix XX of this service manual.
3.5 Event extraction
The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic
or manual extraction of the stored event, fault and maintenance records.
3.5.1 Manual selection
There are three registers available to manually select stored records, there are
also three read only registers allowing the number of stored records to be
determined.
40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249
40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4
40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4
For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored
record. The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the
various types of record stored.
30100 - Number of stored records
30101 - Number of stored fault records
30102 - Number of stored maintenance records
Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created
by the relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the
fault or maintenance record details will also become populated.
3.5.2 Automatic extraction
The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as
they occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault
or maintenance data that may be associated with the event.
The Modbus master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that
have not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status
register 30001. If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has
unextracted events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction
the master station writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400.
The event data together with any fault/maintenance data can be read from the
registers specified below. Once the data has been read the event record can
be marked as having been read by writing a value of 2 to register 40400.
3.5.3 Record data
The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the
same whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms
detailed above.
Event Record Data: 30103 to 30109
The presence of additional data for the event record is indicated by cell
30110, a value of 0 means that there is no additional data.
30110 = 1, fault record data can be read from 30111 to 30197
Page 10 of 14
30110 = 2, maintenance record data can be read from 30198 to 30199

If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual
mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified
above, the event record data in cells 30103 to 30109 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401 to clear independently the stored relay
event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to
reset the relay indications, this has the same effect on the relay as pressing the
clear key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu.
3.6 Disturbance record extraction
The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of
disturbance records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting
a disturbance record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the
data are identical.
3.6.1 Manual selection
Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each
stored record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be
used to determine the identifiers for the stored records
30800 - The number of stored disturbance records
30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record
A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register
40250. It is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this
way produce a list of all the stored records.
3.6.2 Automatic extraction
The Modbus master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance
records by polling register 30001. When the disturbance bit of this register is
set disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next
disturbance record write a value of 3 to cell 40400. Once the disturbance
record data has been read by the master station this record can be marked as
having been read by writing a value of 4 to register 40400.
3.6.3 Record data
The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be
read from registers 30390 to 30393. The disturbance record data itself is
stored in a compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must
be read using a paging system. The number of pages required to extract a
record will depend on the configured size of the record.
When a record is first selected the first page of data will be available in
registers 30803 to 30929 (the number of registers required for the current
page can be read from register 30802, this will be 127 for all but the last
page in the record). Once the first page has been read the next page can be
selected by writing a value of 5 to register 40400. If this action is performed on
the last page for the disturbance record an illegal value error response will be
returned. This error response can be used by the Modbus master to indicate
that the last page of the disturbance record has been read.
Page 11 of 14
3.7 Setting changes

The relay settings can be split into two categories:
• control and support settings
• disturbance record settings and protection setting groups
Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed
immediately. Changes to either the protection setting groups or the disturbance
recorder are stored in a temporary area and must be confirmed before they
are implemented. All the relay settings are edited via Modbus using 4xxxx
addresses. The following points should be noted when settings are being
edited:
• Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a
multi-register write operation.
• The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there
are unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data
associated with these addresses will be discarded.
• If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the
illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same
write operation will be executed.
• If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require
a higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting
changes in the write operation will be discarded.
3.7.1 Password protection
As described in the introduction to this service manual the relay settings can be
subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to
edit a setting is indicated in relay setting database (Appendix A). Level 2 is the
highest level of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required
for editing.
The following registers are available to control Password protection:
40001&40002 Password Entry
40022 Default Password Level
40023&40024 Setting to Change password level 1
40025&40026 Setting to Change password level 2
30008 Can be read to indicate current access level
3.7.2 Control and support settings
Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation.
3.7.3 Protection and disturbance recorder settings
Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and
will not be used by the relay unless a confirm or to abort operation is
performed. Register 40405 can be used to either to confirm or abort the setting
changes within the scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports
four groups of protection settings. The Modbus addresses for each of the four
groups are repeated within the following address ranges:
Page 12 of 14
Group 1 41000-42999
Group 2 43000-44999
Group 3 45000-46999
Group 4 47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups the following
functions are provided.
• Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay
settings by writing to register 40402.
• It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing
the source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407.
It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two
operations defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes
must be confirmed by writing to register 40405.
The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register
40404. An illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set
the active group to one that has been disabled.
Section 4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the

slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The
relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
• Initialisation (Reset)
• Time Synchronisation
• Event Record Extraction
• General Interrogation
• Cyclic Measurements
• General Commands
4.1 Physical connection and link layer
Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear
RS485 port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be
fitted the selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or
the front Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the
next relay power up.
For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay
address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a
change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to re-
establish communications.
4.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters
have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the
communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands
Page 13 of 14
(Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any
unsent messages in the relay’s transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset
CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following
information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:
Manufacturer Name: ALSTOM
The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the
relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P141.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered
up it will also produce a power up event.
4.3 Time synchronisation
The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the
time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/
no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1
data.
If the relay clock is being synchronised using the IRIG-B input then it will not be
possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt
to set the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the
current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronised internal clock.
4.4 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function
type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes
are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardized
messages will not be sent.
Events are categorised using the following information:
Common Address
Function Type
Information number
Appendix 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The
common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay
produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the
standardized messages. For example if the relay produces starts and trips for
four stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the
standardized messages.
Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows
each stage to be indicated. The table in Appendix 1 shows the common
address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the
station address in order to pass these events.
4.5 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function
numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be
returned during the GI cycle are indicated in Appendix 1.
Page 14 of 14
4.6 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this
can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The
rate at which the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using
the Measurement Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel
menu/front Courier port and is active immediately following a change.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The
selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in Appendix 1.
4.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in Appendix 1. The relay will
respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission
(COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
4.8 Test mode
It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to
disable the relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be
performed. This is interpreted as test mode by the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode.
Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in
test mode will have a COT of test mode.
4.9 Disturbance records
The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the
mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains
compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no
disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.
Any attempt to extract disturbance record data from the relay (using ASDU 24)
will result in the relay responding with ASDU 31 end of transmission of
disturbance record with a Type of Order of abortion by the protection
equipment.
4.10 Blocking of monitor direction
The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.
MiCOM P342, P343
Technical Guide
Appendix A
Courier Database
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Appendix A
Page 1 of 82
Appendix A
This Appendix is split into several sections, these are as follows:

• Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
• Menu Datatype Definition
• Event Data for Courier, User Interface and Modbus
• IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
• Internal Digital Signals
• Default Programmable Logic
Menu database
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface,
the front panel user interface and the Modbus interface. This includes all the
relay settings and measurements. Datatypes for Modbus and indexed strings
for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype
Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits
and default value are also defined within this database.
Note: The following labels are used within the database
Label Description Value
V1 Main VT Rating 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
V2 Checksync VT Rating 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
V3 NVD VT Rating 1 (100/110V) or 4 (380/440V)
I1 Phase CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
I2 Earth Fault CT Raing 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A)
I3 Sensitive CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C)
I4 Mutual CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
Menu datatype definition
This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier
and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the
standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting
options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross
reference to from the Menu Database using a G number.
Event data
This section of the Appendix specifies all the event information that can be
produced by the relay. It details exactly how each event will be presented via
the Courier, User and Modbus interfaces.
IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface
for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the
Communications Chapter of this Manual (Volume 1 Chapter 5).
Page 2 of 82
Internal digital signals

This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output
contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512
internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This
numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It
isalso used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay (see the
Event Data section of this Appendix).
Default programmable logic
This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models
of the relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the
MiCOM S1 Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.
References
Chapter 1 Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay
Chapter 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols -
Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Menu Text UI Courier Modbus Address Modbus Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Comment
Col Row Data type Strings Start End Datagroup Level P341 P342 P343
SYSTEM DATA 00 00 * * *
Language 00 01 Indexed String G19 G19 English Setting 0 3 1 2 * * * Sets only for interface being used
Password 00 02 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40001 40002 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 0 * * * Sets only for interface being used
Sys Fn Links 00 03 Binary Flag (8 bits) G95 40003 G95 0 Setting 1 1 1 2 * * *

Indexed Strings
Description 00 04 ASCII Text(16 chars) G3 40004 40011 G3 MiCOM P34X Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Plant Reference 00 05 ASCII Text(16 chars) G3 40012 40019 G3 ALSTOM Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Model Number 00 06 ASCII Text(32 chars) G3 30020 30035 G3 Data * * *
Serial Number 00 08 ASCII Text(7 chars) G3 30044 30051 G3 Data * * *
Frequency 00 09 Unsigned Integer(8 bits) 40020 G1 50 Setting 50 60 10 2 * * *
Comms Level 00 0A Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 2 Data * * *
Relay Address 00 0B Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Address of Rear Courier interface
Address available via LCD
N/A N/A 30001 G26 Data * * * Modbus Only (Relay Status)
Plant Status 00 0C Binary Flag(16 bits) 30002 G4 Data * * *
Control Status 00 0D Binary Flag(16 bits) 30004 G5 Data * * *
Active Group 00 0E Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 30006 G1 Data * * *
CB Trip/Close 00 10 Indexed String(2) G55 40021 G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 *
Software Ref. 1 00 11 ASCII Text(16 chars) 30052 30059 G3 Data * * *
Opto I/P Status 00 20 Binary Flag(16 bits) 30007 G8 Data * * *

Indexed String
Relay O/P Status 00 21 Binary Flag(32 bits) 30008 30009 G9 Data * * *

Indexed String
Alarm Status 00 22 Binary Flag(32 bits) 30011 30012 G96 Data * * *
Page 3 of 82
Indexed String
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Access Level 00 D0 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) G1 30010 G1 Data * * *
Password Control 00 D1 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) G22 40022 G22 2 Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Sets only for interface being used
Password Level 1 00 D2 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40023 40024 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 1 * * * Sets only for interface being used
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
SPassword Level 2 00 D3 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40025 40026 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 2 * * * Sets only for interface being used
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 * * *
30100 G1 No of event records stored

30101 G1 No of fault records stored
30102 G1 No of maintenance records stored
Select Event 01 01 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 40100 0 Setting 0 249 1 0 * * * Max value is the oldest record
Menu Cell Ref N/A 01 02 Cell Reference 30107 G13 (From Record) Data * * * Indicates type of event
See Event sheet
Fault Time 01 03 IEC870 Time & Date 30103 30106 G12 (From Record) Data * * *
Record Text 01 04 Ascii String (32 chars) Data * * * See Event sheet
Record Value 01 05 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 30108 30109 G27 Data * * * Note DTL depends on event type
See Event sheet of Spreadsheet
Select Fault 01 06 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40101 G1 0 Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * Allows Fault Record to be selected
30110 G1 * * * Additional data present
Started Phase N/A Data * * *

ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
Tripped Phase N/A Data * * *

ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
Gen Differential N/A Data *

Trip
Power N/A Data * * *

Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Power N/A Data * * *

Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Field Failure N/A Data * *

Alarm
Page 4 of 82
Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
NPS Thermal N/A Data * *

Alarm Trip
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
System Backup N/A Data * *

Start Trip
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *

Start I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *

Trip I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *

Start IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *

Trip IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *

Start ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *

Trip ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
Restricted E/F N/A Data * * *

Trip IREF>
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *

Start VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *

Trip VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2
100% Stator EF N/A Data *

Start Trip
V/Hz N/A Data * *

Alarm Start Trip
df/dt N/A Data *

Start Trip
V Vector Shift N/A Data *

Trip
Page 5 of 82
Appendix A
Dead Machine N/A Data *
TG8614A
Volume 1
Trip
U/Voltage start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N

V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
U/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N

V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
O/Voltage Start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N

V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
O/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N

V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *

Start F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *

Trip F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *

Start F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start F>1/2
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *

Trip F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
RTD Alarm N/A Data * * Visible if Alarm RTD 1

RTD 1 Label

RTD 2 Label

RTD 3 Label

RTD 4 Label

RTD 5 Label

RTD 6 Label

RTD 7 Label
Page 6 of 82
RTD 8 Label
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
RTD 9 Label

RTD 10 Label
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
RTD Trip N/A Data * * Visible if Trip RTD 1

RTD 1 Label

RTD 2 Label

RTD 3 Label

RTD 4 Label

RTD 5 Label

RTD 6 Label

RTD 7 Label

RTD 8 Label

RTD 9 Label

RTD 10 Label
Breaker Fail N/A Data * * *

CB Fail 1 2 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
Supervision N/A Data * * *

VTS CTS VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
Faulted Phase N/A 01 07 Binary Flag (8 Bits) G16 30111 G16 Data * * * Started phases + tripped phases
Start Elements1 N/A 01 08 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G84 30112 30113 G84 Data * * * Started Elements
Indexed String
Start Elements2 N/A 01 09 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G107 30114 30115 G107 Data * * * Started Elements
Indexed String
Page 7 of 82
Appendix A
Trip Elements1 N/A 01 0A Binary Flag (32 Bits) G85 30116 30117 G85 Data * * * Tripped main elements
TG8614A
Volume 1
Indexed String
Trip Elements2 N/A 01 0B Binary Flag (32 Bits) G86 30118 30119 G86 Data * * * Tripped secondary elements
Indexed String
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Fault Alarms N/A 01 0C Binary Flag (32 Bits) G87 30120 30121 G87 Data * * * Faullt Alarms/Warnings
Indexed String
Time & Date 01 0D IEC870 Time & Date 30122 30125 G12 (From Record) Data * * *
Active Group 01 0E Unsigned Integer 30126 G1 Data * * *
System Frequency 01 0F Courier Number (frequency) 30127 G30 Data * * *
Fault Duration 01 10 Courier Number (time) 30128 30129 G24 Data * * *
CB Operate Time 01 11 Courier Number (time) 30130 G25 Data * * *
Relay Trip Time 01 12 Courier Number (time) 30131 30132 G24 Data * * *
IA 01 13 Courier Number (current) 30133 30134 G24 Data * *

IA-1 *
IB 01 14 Courier Number (current) 30135 30136 G24 Data * *

IB-1 *
IC 01 15 Courier Number (current) 30137 30138 G24 Data * *

IC-1 *
VAB 01 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30139 30140 G24 Data * * *
VBC 01 17 Courier Number (voltage) 30141 30142 G24 Data * * *
VCA 01 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30143 30144 G24 Data * * *
VAN 01 19 Courier Number (voltage) 30145 30146 G24 Data * * *
VBN 01 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30147 30148 G24 Data * * *
VCN 01 1B Courier Number (voltage) 30149 30150 G24 Data * * *
IA-2 01 1C Courier Number (current) 30151 30152 G24 Data *
IB-2 01 1D Courier Number (current) 30153 30154 G24 Data *
IC-2 01 1E Courier Number (current) 30155 30156 G24 Data *
IA Differential 01 1F Courier Number (current) 30157 30158 G24 Data *
Page 8 of 82
IB Differential 01 20 Courier Number (current) 30159 30160 G24 Data *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
IC Differential 01 21 Courier Number (current) 30161 30162 G24 Data *
VN Measured 01 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30163 30164 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived 01 23 Courier Number (voltage) 30165 30166 G24 Data * * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
IN Derived 01 24 Courier Number (current) 30167 30168 G24 Data *

IN Measured * *
IN Sensitive 01 25 Courier Number (current) 30169 30170 G24 Data * * *
IREF Diff 01 26 Courier Number (current) 30171 30172 G24 Data * *
IREF Bias 01 27 Courier Number (current) 30173 30174 G24 Data * *
I2 01 28 Courier Number (current) 30175 30176 G24 Data * *
3 Phase Watts 01 29 Courier Number (Power) 30177 30179 G29 Data * * *
3 Phase VArs 01 2A Courier Number (VAr) 30180 30182 G29 Data * * *
3Ph Power Factor 01 2B Courier Number (Decimal) 30183 G30 Data * * *
RTD 1 Label 01 2C Courier Number (Temperature) 30184 G10 Data * *
RTD 2 Label 01 2D Courier Number (Temperature) 30185 G10 Data * *
RTD 3 Label 01 2E Courier Number (Temperature) 30186 G10 Data * *
RTD 4 Label 01 2F Courier Number (Temperature) 30187 G10 Data * *
RTD 5 Label 01 30 Courier Number (Temperature) 30188 G10 Data * *
df/dt 01 36 Courier Number (Hz/s) 30194 G25 Data * Visible if df/ft trip
V Vector Shift 01 37 Courier Number (Angle) 30195 G30 Data * Visible if V Vector shift trip
Select Maint 01 F0 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40102 G1 Setting 0 4 1 0 * * * Allows Self Test Report to be selected
Page 9 of 82
Maint Text 01 F1 Ascii Text (32 chars) Data * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Maint Type 01 F2 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30196 30197 G27 Data * * *
Volume 1
Maint Data 01 F3 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30198 30199 G27 Data * * *
Reset Indication 01 FF Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 * * *
IA Magnitude 02 01 Courier Number (current) 30200 30201 G24 Data * *

IA-1 Magnitude *
IA Phase Angle 02 02 Courier Number (angle) 30202 G30 Data * *

IA-1 Phase Angle *
IB Magnitude 02 03 Courier Number (current) 30203 30204 G24 Data * *

IB-1 Magnitude *
IB Phase Angle 02 04 Courier Number (angle) 30205 G30 Data * *

IB-1 Phase Angle *
IC Magnitude 02 05 Courier Number (current) 30206 30207 G24 Data * *

IC-1 Magnitude *
IC Phase Angle 02 06 Courier Number (angle) 30208 G30 Data * *

IC-1 Phase Angle *
IN Measured Mag 02 07 Courier Number (current) 30209 30210 G24 Data * *
IN Measured Ang 02 08 Courier Number (angle) 30211 G30 Data * *
IN Derived Mag 02 09 Courier Number (current) 30212 30213 G24 Data *
IN Derived Angle 02 0A Courier Number (angle) 30214 G30 Data *
ISEF Magnitude 02 0B Courier Number (current) 30215 30216 G24 Data * * *
ISEF Angle 02 0C Courier Number (degrees) 30217 G30 Data * * *
I1 Magnitude 02 0D Courier Number (current) 30218 30219 G24 Data * * *
I2 Magnitude 02 0E Courier Number (current) 30220 30221 G24 Data * * *
I0 Magnitude 02 0F Courier Number (current) 30222 30223 G24 Data * * *
IA RMS 02 10 Courier Number (current) 30224 30225 G24 Data * * *
IB RMS 02 11 Courier Number (current) 30226 30227 G24 Data * * *
IC RMS 02 12 Courier Number (current) 30228 30229 G24 Data * * *
Page 10 of 82
Appendix A
VAB Magnitude 02 14 Courier Number (voltage) 30230 30231 G24 Data * * *
TG8614A
Volume 1
VAB Phase Angle 02 15 Courier Number (angle) 30232 G30 Data * * *
VBC Magnitude 02 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30233 30234 G24 Data * * *
VBC Phase Angle 02 17 Courier Number (angle) 30235 G30 Data * * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
VCA Magnitude 02 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30236 30237 G24 Data * * *
VCA Phase Angle 02 19 Courier Number (angle) 30238 G30 Data * * *
VAN Magnitude 02 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30239 30240 G24 Data * * *
VAN Phase Angle 02 1B Courier Number (angle) 30241 G30 Data * * *
VBN Magnitude 02 1C Courier Number (voltage) 30242 30243 G24 Data * * *
VBN Phase Angle 02 1D Courier Number (angle) 30244 G30 Data * * *
VCN Magnitude 02 1E Courier Number (voltage) 30245 30246 G24 Data * * *
VCN Phase Angle 02 1F Courier Number (angle) 30247 G30 Data * * *
VN Measured Mag 02 20 Courier Number (voltage) 30248 30249 G24 Data * * *
VN Measured Ang 02 21 Courier Number (angle) 30250 G30 Data * * *
VN Derived Mag 02 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30251 30252 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived Ang 02 23 Courier Number (angle) 30252 G30 Data * * *
V1 Magnitude 02 24 Courier Number (voltage) 30253 30254 G24 Data * * *
VAN RMS 02 27 Courier Number (voltage) 30259 30260 G24 Data * * *
VBN RMS 02 28 Courier Number (voltage) 30261 30262 G24 Data * * *
VCN RMS 02 29 Courier Number (voltage) 30263 30264 G24 Data * * *
Frequency 02 2D Courier Number (frequency) 30265 G30 Data * * *
MEASUREMENTS 2 03 00 * * *
A Phase Watts 03 01 Courier Number (Power) 30300 30302 G29 Data * * *
B Phase Watts 03 02 Courier Number (Power) 30303 30305 G29 Data * * *
Page 11 of 82
C Phase Watts 03 03 Courier Number (Power) 30306 30308 G29 Data * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
A Phase VArs 03 04 Courier Number (VAr) 30309 30311 G29 Data * * *
Volume 1
B Phase VArs 03 05 Courier Number (VAr) 30312 30314 G29 Data * * *
C Phase VArs 03 06 Courier Number (VAr) 30315 30317 G29 Data * * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
A Phase VA 03 07 Courier Number (VA) 30318 30320 G29 Data * * *
B Phase VA 03 08 Courier Number (VA) 30321 30323 G29 Data * * *
C Phase VA 03 09 Courier Number (VA) 30324 30326 G29 Data * * *
3 Phase Watts 03 0A Courier Number (Power) 30327 30329 G29 Data * * *
3 Phase VArs 03 0B Courier Number (VAr) 30330 30332 G29 Data * * *
3 Phase VA 03 0C Courier Number (VA) 30333 30335 G29 Data * * *
3Ph Power Factor 03 0E Courier Number (decimal) 30339 G30 Data * * *
APh Power Factor 03 0F Courier Number (decimal) 30340 G30 Data * * *
BPh Power Factor 03 10 Courier Number (decimal) 30341 G30 Data * * *
CPh Power Factor 03 11 Courier Number (decimal) 30342 G30 Data * * *
3Ph WHours Fwd 03 12 Courier Number (Wh) 30343 30345 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watt - Hours (Forward)
3Ph WHours Rev 03 13 Courier Number (Wh) 30346 30348 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Hours (Reverse)
3Ph VArHours Fwd 03 14 Courier Number (VArh) 30349 30351 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Forward)
3Ph VArHours Rev 03 15 Courier Number (VArh) 30352 30354 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VAr - Hours (Reverse)
3Ph W Fix Demand 03 16 Courier Number (Power) 30355 30357 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand
3Ph VArs Fix Dem 03 17 Courier Number (Vars) 30358 30360 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
IA Fixed Demand 03 18 Courier Number (Current) 30361 30362 G24 Data * * *
IB Fixed Demand 03 19 Courier Number (Current) 30363 30364 G24 Data * * *
IC Fixed Demand 03 1A Courier Number (Current) 30365 30366 G24 Data * * *
3 Ph W Roll Dem 03 1B Courier Number (Power) 30367 30369 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Rolling Demand
3Ph VArs RollDem 03 1C Courier Number (VAr) 30370 30372 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs - Rolling Demand
IA Roll Demand 03 1D Courier Number (Current) 30373 30374 G24 Data * * *
Page 12 of 82
IB Roll Demand 03 1E Courier Number (Current) 30375 30376 G24 Data * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
IC Roll Demand 03 1F Courier Number (Current) 30377 30378 G24 Data * * *
Volume 1
3Ph W Peak Dem 03 20 Courier Number (Power) 30379 30381 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand
3Ph VAr Peak Dem 03 21 Courier Number (VAr) 30382 30384 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
IA Peak Demand 03 22 Courier Number (Current) 30385 30386 G24 Data * * *
IB Peak Demand 03 23 Courier Number (Current) 30387 30388 G24 Data * * *
IC Peak Demand 03 24 Courier Number (Current) 30389 30390 G24 Data * * *
Reset Demand 03 25 Indexed String G11 40103 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
MEASUREMENTS 3 04 00 * *
IA-2 Magnitude 04 01 Courier Number (Current) 30400 30401 G24 Data *
IA-2 Phase Angle 04 02 Courier Number (Angle) 30402 G30 Data *
IB-2 Magnitude 04 03 Courier Number (Current) 30403 30404 G24 Data *
IB-2 Phase Angle 04 04 Courier Number (Angle) 30405 G30 Data *
IC-2 Magnitude 04 05 Courier Number (Current) 30406 30407 G24 Data *
IC-2 Phase Angle 04 06 Courier Number (Angle) 30408 G30 Data *
IA Differential 04 07 Courier Number (Current) 30409 30410 G24 Data * (090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
IB Differential 04 08 Courier Number (Current) 30411 30412 G24 Data * (090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
IC Differential 04 09 Courier Number (Current) 30413 30414 G24 Data * (090B=1) && (X001 = 1)
IA Bias 04 0A Courier Number (Current) 30415 30416 G24 Data *
IB Bias 04 0B Courier Number (Current) 30417 30418 G24 Data *
IC Bias 04 0C Courier Number (Current) 30419 30420 G24 Data *
IREF Diff 04 0D Courier Number (Current) 30421 30422 G24 Data * * (0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3)
IREF Bias 04 0E Courier Number (Current) 30423 30424 G24 Data * * (0915=1) && (XA01 >= 3)
VN 3rd Harmonic 04 0F Courier Number (Voltage) 30425 30426 G24 Data *
Rotor Thermal 04 10 Courier Number (Percentage) 30427 G1 Data * * (090E=1) && (X304 = 1)
Reset Thermal 04 11 Indexed String G11 40104 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * (090E=1) && (X304 = 1)
Page 13 of 82
RTD 1 04 12 Courier Number (Temperature) 30428 G10 Data * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
RTD 9 04 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 30436 G10 Data * *
RTD 10 04 1B Courier Number (Temperature) 30437 G10 Data * *
RTD Open Cct 04 1C Binary Flag (10 bits) G108 30438 G108 Data * *
RTD Short Cct 04 1D Binary Flag (10 bits) G109 30439 G109 Data * *
RTD data error 04 1E Binary Flag (10 bits) G110 30440 G110 Data * *
Reset RTD flags 04 1F Indexed string G11 40105 G11‘ No Command 0 1 1 1 * *
CB CONDITION 06 00 * * * CB CONDITION MONITORING
CB Operations 06 01 Unsigned Integer 30600 G1 Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
Total IA Broken 06 02 Courier Number (current) 30601 30602 G24 Data * * * Broken Current A Phase
Total IB Broken 06 03 Courier Number (current) 30603 30604 G24 Data * * * Broken Current B Phase
Total IC Broken 06 04 Courier Number (current) 30605 30606 G24 Data * * * Broken Current C Phase
CB Operate Time 06 05 Courier Number (time) 30607 G25 Data * * * Circuit Breaker operating time
Reset CB Data 06 06 Indexed String G11 40150 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * * Reset All Values
CB CONTROL 07 00 * * *
CB Control by 07 01 Indexed String G99 40200 G99 Disabled Setting 0 7 1 2 *
Close Pulse Time 07 02 Courier Number (Time) 40201 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
Trip Pulse Time 07 03 Courier Number (Time) 40202 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 *
Man Close Delay 07 05 Courier Number (Time) 40203 G2 10 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * Manual Close Delay
Page 14 of 82
CB Healthy Time 07 06 Courier Number (Time) 40204 40205 G35 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Lockout Reset 07 08 Indexed String G11 40206 G11 No Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Volume 1
Reset Lockout by 07 09 Indexed String G81 40207 G81 CB Close Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Man Close RstDly 07 0A Courier Number (Time) 40208 G2 5 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * Manual Close Reset Delay
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
CB Status Input 07 11 Indexed String 40209 G118 None Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
DATE AND TIME 08 00 * * *
Date/Time N/A 08 01 IEC870 Time & Date 40300 40303 G12 Setting 0 * * *
Date N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only

12-Jan-98
Time N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only

12:00
IRIG-B Sync 08 04 Indexed String G37 40304 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IRIG-B Status 08 05 Indexed String G17 30090 G17 Data * * *
Battery Status 08 06 Indexed String G59 30091 G59 Data * * *
Battery Alarm 08 07 Indexed String G37 40305 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CONFIGURATION 09 00 * * *
Restore Defaults 09 01 Indexed String G53 40402 G53 No Operation Command 0 5 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 09 02 Indexed String G61 40403 G61 Menu Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Active Settings 09 03 Indexed String G90 40404 G90 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Save Changes 09 04 Indexed String G62 40405 G62 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Copy From 09 05 Indexed String G90 40406 G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Copy To 09 06 Indexed String G98 40407 G98 No Operation Command 0 3 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 1 09 07 Indexed String G37 40408 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 2 09 08 Indexed String G37 40409 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 3 09 09 Indexed String G37 40410 G37 Disbaled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 4 09 0A Indexed String G37 40411 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Gen Differential 09 0B Indexed String G37 40412 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Page 15 of 82
Power 09 0C Indexed String G37 40413 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Field Failure 09 0D Indexed String G37 40414 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
NPS Thermal 09 0E Indexed String G37 40415 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
System Backup 09 0F Indexed String G37 40416 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Overcurrent 09 10 Indexed String G37 40417 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Earth Fault 09 13 Indexed String G37 40418 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
SEF/REF Prot’n 09 15 Indexed String G37 40419 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *

Enabled * *
Residual O/V NVD 09 16 Indexed String G37 40420 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Residual Overvoltage
100% Stator EF 09 17 Indexed String G37 40421 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V/Hz 09 18 Indexed String G37 40422 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
df/dt 09 19 Indexed String G37 40423 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V Vector Shift 09 1A Indexed String G37 40424 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Dead Machine 09 1B Indexed String G37 40425 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 09 1C Indexed String G37 40426 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Volt Protection 09 1D Indexed String G37 40427 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Freq Protection 09 1E Indexed String G37 40428 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
RTD Inputs 09 1F Indexed String G37 40429 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
CB Fail 09 20 Indexed String G37 40430 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Supervision 09 21 Indexed String G37 40431 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Input Labels 09 25 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Output Labels 09 26 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
RTD Labels 09 27 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * *
CT & VT Ratios 09 28 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Recorder Control 09 29 Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Disturb Recorder 09 2A Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Disturbance recorder
Measure’t Setup 09 2B Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Page 16 of 82
Comms Settings 09 2C Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Commission Tests 09 2D Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Volume 1
Setting Values 09 2E Indexed String G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
40400 G18 * * * Record selection command register
40401 G6 * * * Record control command register
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A 00 * * * values for multiplier see mult

column
Main VT Primary 0A 01 Courier Number (Voltage) 40500 40501 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
Main VT Sec’y 0A 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 40502 G2 110 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
Label M1=0A01/0A02
NVD VT Primary 0A 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 40506 40507 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Neutral Displacement VT Primary
Label V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/
110
NVD VT Secondary 0A 06 Courier Number (Voltage) 40508 G2 110 Setting 80*V3 140*V3 1*V3 2 * * * Neutral Displacement VT Secondary
Label M3=0A05/0A06
Phase CT Primary 0A 07 Courier Number (Current) 40509 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Phase CT Sec’y 0A 08 Courier Number (Current) 40510 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * *
Label M4=0A07/0A08
E/F CT Primary 0A 09 Courier Number (Current) 40511 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
E/F CT Secondary 0A 0A Courier Number (Current) 40512 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * *

Label M5=0A09/0A0A
SEF CT Primary 0A 0B Courier Number (Current) 40513 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
SEF CT Secondary 0A 0C Courier Number (Current) 40514 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * *

Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
RECORD CONTROL 0B 00 * * *
Clear Events 0B 01 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Faults 0B 02 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Maint 0B 03 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
DISTURB RECORDER 0C 00 * * * DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 0C 01 Courier Number (Time) 40600 G2 1.5 Setting 0.1 10.5 0.01 2 * * *
Trigger Position 0C 02 Courier Number (%) 40601 G2 33.3 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
Page 17 of 82
Trigger Mode 0C 03 Indexed String G34 40602 G34 Single 0 1 1 2 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Analog Channel 1 0C 04 Indexed String G31 40603 G31 VAN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model 1,
8 for Model 2,
11 for Model 3
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Analog Channel 2 0C 05 Indexed String G31 40604 G31 VBN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model 1,
8 for Model 2,
11 for Model 3
Analog Channel 3 0C 06 Indexed String G31 40605 G31 VCN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 4 0C 07 Indexed String G31 40606 G31 VN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 5 0C 08 Indexed String G31 40607 G31 IA Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 6 0C 09 Indexed String G31 40608 G31 IB Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 7 0C 0A Indexed String G31 40609 G31 IC Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2,
11 for Model3
Analog Channel 8 0C 0B Indexed String G31 40610 G31 IN SEF Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * * “** Max = 7 for Model1,
8 for Model2.
11 for Model3
Digital Input 1 0C 0C Indexed String G32 40611 G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * * * Note: Number of signals is model
dependent
Input 1 Trigger 0C 0D Indexed String G66 40612 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 2 0C 0E Indexed String G32 40613 G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * * *
Input 2 Trigger 0C 0F Indexed String G66 40614 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 3 0C 10 Indexed String G32 40615 G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * * *
Input 3 Trigger 0C 11 Indexed String G66 40616 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Page 18 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Digital Input 8 0C 1A Indexed String G32 40625 G32 Opto Input 1 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Relay 8 *
Input 8 Trigger 0C 1B Indexed String G66 40626 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 9 0C 1C Indexed String G32 40627 G32 Opto Input 2 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Relay 9 *
Digital Input 10 0C 1E Indexed String G32 40629 G32 Opto Input 3 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Relay 10 *
Digital Input 11 0C 20 Indexed String G32 40631 G32 Opto Input 4 Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Relay 11 *
Relay 12 *
Relay 13 *
Relay 14 *
Page 19 of 82
Appendix A
Opto Input 1 *
TG8614A
Volume 1
Digital Input 16 0C 2A Indexed String G32 40641 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Digital Input 17 0C 2C Indexed String G32 40643 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 3 *
Digital Input 18 0C 2E Indexed String G32 40645 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 4 *
Digital Input 19 0C 30 Indexed String G32 40647 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 5 *
Opto Input 6 *
Opto Input 7 *
Opto Input 8 *
Opto Input 9 *
Digital Input 24 0C 3A Indexed String G32 40657 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 10 *
Page 20 of 82
Digital Input 25 0C 3C Indexed String G32 40659 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Appendix A
Opto Input 11 *
TG8614A
Volume 1
Digital Input 26 0C 3E Indexed String G32 40661 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * *
Opto Input 12 *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Opto Input 13 *
Opto Input 14 *
Opto Input 15 *
Opto Input 16 *
Digital Input 31 0C 48 Indexed String G32 40671 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 32 0C 4A Indexed String G32 40673 G32 Not Used Setting 0 See Note 1 2 * * *
MEASURE’T SETUP 0D 00 * * * MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Default Display 01 Indexed String G52 40700 G52 Description Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Local Values 02 Indexed String G54 40701 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Local Measurement Values
Remote Values 03 Indexed String G54 40702 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Remote Measurement Values
Measurement Ref 04 Indexed String G56 40703 G56 VA Setting 0 5 1 1 * * * Measurement Phase Reference
Page 21 of 82
Measurement Mode 05 Unsigned Integer 40705 G1 0 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Fix Dem Period 06 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40706 G2 15 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Fixed Demand Interval
Volume 1
Roll Sub Period 07 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40707 G2 1 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Rolling demand sub period
Num Sub Periods 08 Unsigned Integer 40708 G1 15 Setting 1 15 1 2 * * * Number of rolling sub-periods
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
COMMUNICATIONS 0E 00 * * *
Rear Protocol 0E 01 Indexed String G71 Courier Data * * *
Remote Address 0E 02 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Build = Courier or IEC60870-5-103
Remote Address 0E 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 247 Setting 1 247 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Inactivity Timer 0E 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * *
Baud Rate 0E 04 Indexed String G38 9600 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 0E 04 Indexed String G38 9600 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Parity 0E 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Measure’t Period 0E 06 Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 1 60 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Physical Link 0E 07 Indexed String G21 RS485 Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103

and Fibre Optic board fitted
Function Type 0E 08 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 224 Setting 0 253 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
COMMISSION TESTS 0F 00 * * *
Opto I/P Status 0F 01 Binary Flag(16 bits) 30700 G8 Data * * *

Indexed String
Relay O/P Status 0F 02 Binary Flag(32 bits) 30701 30702 G9 Data * * *

Indexed String
Test Port Status 0F 03 Binary Flag(8 bits) 30703 0-7 Data * * *

Indexed String
LED Status 0F 04 Binary Flag(8 bits) 0-7 30704 0-7 Data * * *
Monitor Bit 1 0F 05 Unsigned Integer 40850 G1 64 Setting 0 511 1 1 * * * Default LED 1
Page 22 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Monitor Bit 6 0F 0A Unsigned Integer 40855 G1 69 Setting 0 511 1 1 * * * Default LED 6
Monitor Bit 7 0F 0B Unsigned Integer 40856 G1 70 Setting 0 511 1 1 * * * Default LED 7
Monitor Bit 8 0F 0C Unsigned Integer 40857 G1 71 Setting 0 511 1 1 * * * Default LED 8

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Test Mode 0F 0D Indexed String G37 40858 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Test Pattern 0F 0E Binary Flag (21bits) G9 40859 40860 G9 0 Setting 0 20 1 2 * * *

Indexed String
Contact Test 0F 0F Indexed String G93 40861 G93 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Test LEDs 0F 10 Binary Flag (8bits) G94 40862 G94 No Operation Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Indexed String
CB MONITOR SETUP 10 00 * * *
Broken I^ 10 01 Courier Number (Decimal) 40151 G2 2 Setting 1 2 0.1 2 * * * Broken Current Index
I^ Maintenance 10 02 Indexed String G88 40152 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current maintenance alarm
I^ Maintenance 10 03 Courier Number (Current) 40153 40154 G35 1000 Setting 1 * NM1 25000 1 * NM1 2 * * * Broken Current maintenance
threshold
* NM1
I^ Lockout 10 04 Indexed String G88 40155 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current lockout alarm
I^ Lockout 10 05 Courier Number (Current) 40156 40157 G35 2000 Setting 1 * NM1 25000 1 * NM1 2 * * * Broken Current lockout threshold
* NM1
No. CB Ops Maint 10 06 Indexed String G88 40158 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips maintenance
alarm
No. CB Ops Maint 10 07 Unsigned Integer 40159 G1 10 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * * CB Trips maintenance threshold
No. CB Ops Lock 10 08 Indexed String G88 40160 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips lockout alarm
No. CB Ops Lock 10 09 Unsigned Integer 40161 G1 20 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * * CB Trips lockout threshold
CB Time Maint 10 0A Indexed String G88 40162 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * CB Operating Time maintenance alarm
CB Time Maint 10 0B Courier Number (Time) 40163 40164 G35 0.1 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * * CB Operating Time maintenance
threshold
CB Time Lockout 10 0C Indexed String G88 40165 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * CB Operating Time lockout alarm
Page 23 of 82
CB Time Lockout 10 0D Courier Number (Time) 40166 40167 G35 0.2 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * * CB Operating Time lockout threshold
Appendix A
Fault Freq Lock 10 0E Indexed String G88 40168 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Excessive fault frequency alarm
TG8614A
Volume 1
Fault Freq Count 10 0F Unsigned Integer 40169 G1 10 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Fault Freq Time 10 10 Courier Number (Time) 40170 40171 G35 3600 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Time
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
GROUP 1 30 00 *
GEN DIFF
GenDiff Function 30 01 Indexed String G101 41000 G101 Percentage Bias Setting 0 2 1 2 *
Gen Diff Is1 30 02 Courier Number (Current) 41001 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k1 30 03 Courier Number (Percentage) 41002 G2 0 Setting 0 20 5 2 *
Gen Diff Is2 30 04 Courier Number (Current) 41003 G2 1.2 Setting 1*I1 5*I1 0.1*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k2 30 05 Courier Number (Percentage) 41004 G2 150 Setting 20 150 10 2 *
GROUP 1 31 00 * * *
POWER
Power1 Function 31 01 Indexed String G102 41050 G102 Over Setting 0 3 1 2 *

Reverse * *
-P>1 Setting 31 02 Courier Number (Power) 41051 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<1 Setting 31 03 Courier Number (Power) 41052 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
10 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P>1 Setting 31 04 Courier Number (Power) 41053 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Power1 TimeDelay 31 05 Courier Number (Time) 41054 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power1 DO Timer 31 06 Courier Number (Time) 41055 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P1 Poledead Inh 31 07 Indexed String G37 41056 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Power2 Function 31 08 Indexed String G102 41057 G102 Disabled Setting 0 3 1 2 *

Low Forward * *
P>2 Setting 31 09 Courier Number (Power) 41058 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<2 Setting 31 0A Courier Number (Power) 41059 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
Page 24 of 82
10 4*V1*I1 40*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Appendix A
P>2 Setting 31 0B Courier Number (Power) 41060 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
TG8614A
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Volume 1
Power2 TimeDelay 31 0C Courier Number (Time) 41061 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power2 DO Timer 31 0D Courier Number (Time) 41062 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
P2 Poledead Inh 31 0E Indexed String G37 41063 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1 32 00 * *
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status 32 01 Indexed String G37 41100 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Angle 32 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41101 G2 15 Setting 15 75 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Delay 32 03 Courier Number (Time) 41102 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 Status 32 04 Indexed String G37 41103 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail1 -Xa1 32 05 Courier Number (Impedance) 41104 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 Xb1 32 06 Courier Number (Impedance) 41105 G2 220 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 TimeDelay 32 07 Courier Number (Time) 41106 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 DO Timer 32 08 Courier Number (Time) 41107 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 Status 32 09 Indexed String G37 41108 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail2 -Xa2 32 0A Courier Number (Impedance) 41109 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail2 Xb2 32 0B Courier Number (Impedance) 41110 G2 110 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail2 TimeDelay 32 0C Courier Number (Time) 41111 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 DO Timer 32 0D Courier Number (Time) 41112 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 33 00 * *
NPS THERMAL
I2>1 Alarm 33 01 Indexed String G37 41150 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
I2>1 Current Set 33 02 Courier Number (Current) 41151 G2 0.05 Setting 0.03*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I2>1 Time Delay 33 03 Courier Number (Time) 41152 G2 20s Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
I2>2 Trip 33 04 Indexed String G37 41153 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Page 25 of 82
I2>2 Current Set 33 05 Courier Number (Current) 41154 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
I2>2 k Setting 33 06 Courier Number (Time) 41155 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
Volume 1
I2>2 kRESET 33 07 Courier Number (Time) 41156 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
I2>2 tMAX 33 08 Courier Number (Time) 41157 G2 1000 Setting 500 2000 1 2 * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
I2>2 tMIN 33 09 Courier Number (Time) 41158 G2 0.25 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 34 00 * *
SYSTEM BACKUP
Backup Function 34 01 Indexed String G103 41200 G103 Voltage controlled Setting 0 3 1 2 * *
Vector Rotation 34 02 Indexed String G104 41201 G104 None Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
V Dep OC Char 34 03 Indexed String G111 41202 G111 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 9 1 2 * *
V Dep OC I> Set 34 04 Courier Number (Current) 41203 G2 1 Setting 0.8*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
V Dep OC T Dial 34 05 Courier Number (Decimal) 41204 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * *
V Dep OC Reset 34 06 Indexed String 41205 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * OC reset characteritic selection.
V Dep OC Delay 34 07 Courier Number (Time) 41206 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * Apply to DT trip characteristic only
V Dep OC TMS 34 08 Courier Number (Decimal) 41207 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * *
V Dep OC tRESET 34 09 Courier Number (Time) 41208 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
V Dep OC V<1 Set 34 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 41209 G2 80 Setting 20*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC V<2 Set 34 0B Courier Number (Voltage) 41210 G2 60 Setting 20*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC k Set 34 0C Courier Number (Decimal) 41211 G2 0.25 Setting 0.25 1 0.05 2 * *
Z< Setting 34 0D Courier Number (Impedance) 41212 G2 70 Setting 2*V1/I1 120*V1/I10.5*V1/I1 2 * *
Z< Time Delay 34 0E Courier Number (Time) 41213 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z< tRESET 34 0F Courier Number (Time) 41214 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 35 00 * * *
OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function 35 01 Indexed String G43 41250 G43 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 10 1 2 *
Disabled * *
Page 26 of 82
I>1 Direction 35 02 Indexed String G44 41251 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
Appendix A
I>1 Current Set 35 03 Courier Number (Current) 41252 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
TG8614A
Volume 1
I>1 Time Delay 35 04 Courier Number (Time) 41253 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
I>1 TMS 35 05 Courier Number (Decimal) 41254 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
I>1 Time Dial 35 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41255 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * *
I>1 Reset Char 35 07 Indexed String G60 41256 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
I>1 tRESET 35 08 Courier Number (Time) 41257 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
I>2 Function 35 09 Indexed String G43 41258 G43 Disabled Setting 0 10 1 2 *

G105 G105 DT 0 1 1 2 * *
I>2 Direction 35 0A Indexed String G44 41259 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>2 Current Set 35 0B Courier Number (Current) 41260 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
10 0.08*I1 10.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I>2 Time Delay 35 0C Courier Number (Time) 41261 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
0 * *
I>2 TMS 35 0D Courier Number (Decimal) 41262 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
I>2 Time Dial 35 0E Courier Number (Decimal) 41263 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 *
I>2 Reset Char 35 0F Indexed String G60 41264 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>2 tRESET 35 10 Courier Number (Time) 41265 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>3 Status 35 11 Indexed String G37 41266 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>3 Current Set 35 13 Courier Number (Current) 41268 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>3 Time Delay 35 14 Courier Number (Time) 41269 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>4 Status 35 16 Indexed String G37 41270 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>4 Current Set 35 18 Courier Number (Current) 41272 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>4 Time Delay 35 19 Courier Number (Time) 41273 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I> Char Angle 35 1A Courier Number (Angle) 41274 G2 30 Setting -95 95 1 2 * I> Characteristic Angle
I> Function Link 35 1B Binary Flag G14 41275 G14 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
Page 27 of 82
GROUP 1 38 00 * * *
Appendix A
EARTH FAULT
TG8614A
Volume 1
IN Input 38 01 Indexed String G49 Derived Data *
Measured Data * *
IN>1 Function 38 02 Indexed String G43 41400 G43 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
IN>1 Direction 38 03 Indexed String G44 41401 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>1 Current 38 04 Courier Number (Current) 41402 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.1 0.02*I2 4.0*I2 0.01*I2 * *
IN>1 Time Delay 38 05 Courier Number (Time) 41403 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * *
IN>1 TMS 38 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41404 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
IN>1 Time Dial 38 07 Courier Number (Decimal) 41405 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * *
IN>1 Reset Char 38 08 Indexed String G60 41406 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IN>1 tRESET 38 09 Courier Number (Time) 41407 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
IN>2 Function 38 0A Indexed String G43 41408 G43 Disabled Setting 0 10 1 2 *

G105 G105 Disabled 0 1 1 2 * *
IN>2 Direction 38 0B Indexed String G44 41409 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>2 Current 38 0C Courier Number (Current) 41410 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.45 0.02*I2 10.0*I2 0.01*I2 * *
IN>2 Time Delay 38 0D Courier Number (Time) 41411 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
0 * *
IN>2 TMS 38 0E Courier Number (Decimal) 41412 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
IN>2 Time Dial 38 0F Courier Number (Decimal) 41413 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 *
IN>2 Reset Char 38 10 Indexed String G60 41414 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>2 tRESET 38 11 Courier Number (Time) 41415 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
IN>3 Status 38 12 Indexed String G37 41416 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>3 Current 38 14 Courier Number (Current) 41418 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>3 Time Delay 38 15 Courier Number (Time) 41419 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN>4 Status 38 16 Indexed String G37 41420 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Page 28 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
IN>4 Current 38 18 Courier Number (Current) 41422 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>4 Time Delay 38 19 Courier Number (Time) 41423 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN> Func Link 38 1A Binary Flags G63 41424 G63 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
IN> DIRECTIONAL 38 1B (Sub Heading) 2 *
IN> Char Angle 38 1C Courier Number(Angle) 41425 G2 -60 Setting -95 95 1 2 *
IN> Pol 38 1D Indexed String G46 41426 G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Input 38 1E Indexed String G49 41427 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Set 38 1F Courier Number (Voltage) 41428 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 22*V1 0.5*V1 2 * V1 applied for VN set to dervied.
IN> V2pol Set 38 20 Courier Number (Voltage) 41429 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 25*V1 0.5*V1 2 *
IN> I2pol Set 38 21 Courier Number (Current) 41430 G2 0.08 Setting 0.08*I1 1*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
GROUP 1 3A 00 * * *
SEF/REF PROT’N
SEF/REF Options 3A 01 Indexed String G58 41500 G58 SEF Setting 0 2 1 2 *

0 5 1 2 * *
ISEF>1 Function 3A 02 Indexed String G43 41501 G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 *

G105 G105 0 1 1 * *
ISEF>1 Direction 3A 03 Indexed String G44 41502 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
ISEF>1 Current 3A 04 Courier Number (Current) 41503 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 * * *
ISEF>1 Delay 3A 05 Courier Number (Time) 41504 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * *
ISEF>1 TMS 3A 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41505 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
ISEF>1 Time Dial 3A 07 Courier Number (Decimal) 41506 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 *
ISEF>1 Reset Chr 3A 08 Indexed String G60 41507 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>1 tRESET 3A 09 Courier Number (Time) 41508 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 Function 3A 0A Indexed String G43 41509 G43 Disabled Setting 0 10 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Direction 3A 0B Indexed String G44 41510 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Current 3A 0C Courier Number (Current) 41511 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 *
Page 29 of 82
ISEF>2 Delay 3A 0D Courier Number (Time) 41512 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
Appendix A
TG8614A
ISEF>2 TMS 3A 0E Courier Number (Decimal) 41513 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
Volume 1
ISEF>2 Time Dial 3A 0F Courier Number (Decimal) 41514 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 *
ISEF>2 Reset Chr 3A 10 Indexed String G60 41515 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
ISEF>2 tRESET 3A 11 Courier Number (Time) 41516 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>3 Status 3A 12 Indexed String G37 41517 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>3 Direction 3A 13 Indexed String G44 41518 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
ISEF>3 Current 3A 14 Courier Number (Current) 41519 G2 0.4 Setting 0.005*I3 0.8*I3 0.001*I3 2 *
ISEF>3 Delay 3A 15 Courier Number (Time) 41520 G2 0.5 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
ISEF>4 Status 3A 16 Indexed String G37 41521 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>4 Direction 3A 17 Indexed String G44 41522 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
ISEF>4 Current 3A 18 Courier Number (Current) 41523 G2 0.6 Setting 0.005*I3 0.8*I3 0.001*I3 2 *
ISEF>4 Delay 3A 19 Courier Number (Time) 41524 G2 0.25 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
ISEF> Func Link 3A 1A Binary Flags G64 41525 G64 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *

1 1 1 2 * *
ISEF DIRECTIONAL 3A 1B (Sub Heading) 2 * * *
ISEF> Char Angle 3A 1C Courier Number(Angle) 41526 G2 90 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * *
ISEF>VNpol Input 3A 1D Indexed String G49 41527 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
ISEF> VNpol Set 3A 1E Courier Number (Voltage) 41528 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 22*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied.
0.5*V3 22*V3 0.5*V3 * * * V3 applied when VN set to measured
WATTMETRIC SEF 3A 1F (Sub Heading) * * *
PN> Setting 3A 20 Courier Number (Power) 41529 G2 9 Setting 0.0*V1*I3 20*V1*I3 0.05*V1*I3 2 * * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied.
0.0*V3*I3 20*V3*I3 0.05*V3*I3 * * * V3 applied when VN set to measured
RESTRICTED E/F 3A 21 (Sub Heading) * * *
IREF> k1 3A 22 Courier Number (Percentage) 41530 G2 20 Setting 0 20 1 2 * *
IREF> k2 3A 23 Courier Number (Percentage) 41531 G2 150 Setting 0 150 1 2 * *
Page 30 of 82
IREF> Is1 3A 24 Courier Number (Current) 41532 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I1 1.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
IREF> Is2 3A 25 Courier Number (Current) 41533 G2 1 Setting 0.1*I1 1.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
Volume 1
IREF> Is 3A 26 Courier Number (Current) 41534 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I3 1.0*I3 0.01*I3 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
GROUP 1 3B 00 * * *
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input 3B 01 Indexed String G49 41550 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>1 Function 3B 02 Indexed String G23 41551 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
VN>1 Voltage Set 3B 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41552 G2 5 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied.
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 V3 applied when VN set to measured
VN>1 Time Delay 3B 04 Courier Number (Time) 41553 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>1 TMS 3B 05 Courier Number (Decimal) 41554 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
VN>1 tReset 3B 06 Courier Number (Time) 41555 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>2 Status 3B 07 Indexed String G37 41556 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>2 Voltage Set 3B 08 Courier Number (Voltage) 41557 G2 10 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * * V1 applied when VN set to dervied.
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 V3 applied when VN set to measured
VN>2 Time Delay 3B 09 Courier Number (Time) 41558 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1 3C 00 *
100% STATOR EF
100%St EF Status 3C 01 Indexed String G37 41600 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
100% St EF VN3H< 3C 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 41601 G2 1 Setting 0.3*V3 20*V3 0.1*V3 2 *
100% St EF Delay 3C 03 Courier Number (Time) 41602 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
100% St EF V<Inh 3C 04 Courier Number (Voltage) 41603 G2 80 Setting 30*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
GROUP 1 3D 00 * *
VOLTS/HZ
V/Hz Alm Status 3D 01 Indexed String G37 41650 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Page 31 of 82
V/Hz Alarm Set 3D 02 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41651 G2 2.31 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
Appendix A
V/Hz Alarm Delay 3D 03 Courier Number (Time) 41652 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
TG8614A
Volume 1
V/Hz Trip Func 3D 04 Indexed String G23 41653 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Set 3D 05 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41654 G2 2.42 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
V/Hz Trip TMS 3D 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41655 G2 1 Setting 1 63 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Delay 3D 07 Courier Number (Time) 41656 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 3E 00 *
DF/DT
df/dt Status 3E 01 Indexed String G37 41700 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
df/dt Setting 3E 02 Courier Number (Hz/s) 41701 G2 0.2 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
df/dt Time Delay 3E 03 Courier Number (Time) 41702 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
df/dt f Low 3E 04 Courier Number (Frequency) 41703 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
df/dt f High 3E 05 Courier Number (Frequency) 41704 G2 50.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1 3F 00 *
V VECTOR SHIFT
V Shift Status 3F 01 Indexed String G37 41750 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V Shift Angle 3F 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41751 G2 10 Setting 2 30 1 2 *
GROUP 1 40 00 *
DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status 40 01 Indexed String G37 41800 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Dead Mach I> 40 02 Courier Number (Current) 41801 G2 0.1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Dead Mach V< 40 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41802 G2 80 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
Dead Mach tPU 40 04 Courier Number (Time) 41803 G2 5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
Dead Mach tDO 40 05 Courier Number (Time) 41804 G2 0.5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
GROUP 1 41 00 *
Page 32 of 82
RECONNECT DELAY
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Reconnect Status 41 01 Indexed String G37 41850 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 41 02 Courier Number (Time) 41852 G2 60 Setting 0 300 0.01 2 *
Reconnect tPULSE 41 03 Courier Number (Time) 41853 G2 1 Setting 0.01 30 0.01 2 *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
GROUP 1 42 00 * * *
VOLT PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE 42 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
V< Measur’t Mode 42 02 Indexed String G47 41950 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V< Operate Mode 42 03 Indexed String G48 41951 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<1 Function 42 04 Indexed String G23 41952 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V<1 Voltage Set 42 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 41953 G2 50 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
V<1 Time Delay 42 06 Courier Number (Time) 41954 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<1 TMS 42 07 Courier Number (Decimal) 41955 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
V<1 Poledead Inh 42 08 Indexed String G37 41956 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Status 42 09 Indexed String G37 41957 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Voltage Set 42 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 41958 G2 38 Setting 10*V1 70*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Phase-Neutral
V<2 Time Delay 42 0B Courier Number (Time) 41959 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<2 Poledead Inh 42 0C Indexed String G37 41960 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
OVERVOLTAGE 42 0D (Sub Heading) * * *
V> Measur’t Mode 42 0E Indexed String G47 41961 G47 Phase-Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V> Operate Mode 42 0F Indexed String G48 41962 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V>1 Function 42 10 Indexed String G23 41963 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V>1 Voltage Set 42 11 Courier Number (Voltage) 41964 G2 130 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>1 Time Delay 42 12 Courier Number (Time) 41965 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Page 33 of 82
V>1 TMS 42 13 Courier Number (Decimal) 41966 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
Appendix A
V>2 Status 42 14 Indexed String G37 41967 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
TG8614A
Volume 1
V>2 Voltage Set 42 15 Courier Number (Voltage) 41968 G2 150 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>2 Time Delay 42 16 Courier Number (Time) 41969 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
GROUP 1 43 00 * * *
FREQ PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY 43 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
F<1 Status 43 02 Indexed String G37 42000 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<1 Setting 43 03 Courier Number (Frequency) 42001 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<1 Time Delay 43 04 Courier Number (Time) 42002 G2 4 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Status 43 05 Indexed String G37 42003 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<2 Setting 43 06 Courier Number (Frequency) 42004 G2 49 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Time Delay 43 07 Courier Number (Time) 42005 G2 3 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Status 43 08 Indexed String G37 42006 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<3 Setting 43 09 Courier Number (Frequency) 42007 G2 48.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Time Delay 43 0A Courier Number (Time) 42008 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Status 43 0B Indexed String G37 42009 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<4 Setting 43 0C Courier Number (Frequency) 42010 G2 48 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Time Delay 43 0D Courier Number (Time) 42011 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F< Function Link 43 0E Binary Flag (4 bits) G65 42012 G65 16 Setting 15 4 1 2 * * *
OVER FREQUENCY 43 0F (Sub Heading) * * *
F>1 Status 43 10 Indexed String G37 42013 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>1 Setting 43 11 Courier Number (Frequency) 42014 G2 50.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F>1 Time Delay 43 12 Courier Number (Time) 42015 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F>2 Status 43 13 Indexed String G37 42016 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>2 Setting 43 14 Courier Number (Frequency) 42017 G2 51 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
Page 34 of 82
F>2 Time Delay 43 15 Courier Number (Time) 42018 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
GROUP 1 44 00 * *
Volume 1
RTD PROTECTION
Select RTD 44 01 Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed StringG50 42050 G50 0 Setting 1023 10 1 2 * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
RTD 1 Alarm Set 44 02 Courier Number (Temperature) 42051 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Alarm Dly 44 03 Courier Number (Time) 42052 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Set 44 04 Courier Number (Temperature) 42053 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Dly 44 05 Courier Number (Time) 42054 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Set 44 0A Courier Number (Temperature) 42059 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Dly 44 0B Courier Number (Time) 42060 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Set 44 0C Courier Number (Temperature) 42061 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Dly 44 0D Courier Number (Time) 42062 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Set 44 0E Courier Number (Temperature) 42063 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Dly 44 0F Courier Number (Time) 42064 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
Page 35 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
RTD 7 Alarm Set 44 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 42075 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Alarm Dly 44 1B Courier Number (Time) 42076 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
RTD 7 Trip Set 44 1C Courier Number (Temperature) 42077 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Trip Dly 44 1D Courier Number (Time) 42078 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Set 44 1E Courier Number (Temperature) 42079 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Dly 44 1F Courier Number (Time) 42080 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
GROUP 1 45 00 * * *
CB FAIL & I<
BREAKER FAIL 45 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
CB Fail 1 Status 45 02 Indexed String G37 42100 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 1 Timer 45 03 Courier Number (Time) 42101 G2 0.2 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Status 45 04 Indexed String G37 42102 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Timer 45 05 Courier Number (Time) 42103 G2 0.4 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CBF Non I Reset 45 06 Indexed String G68 42104 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Page 36 of 82
CBF Ext Reset 45 07 Indexed String G68 42105 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
UNDER CURRENT 45 08 (Sub Heading) * * *
Volume 1
I< Current Set 45 09 Courier Number (Current) 42106 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I1 3.2*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
IN< Current Set 45 0A Courier Number (Current) 42107 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I2 3.2*I2 0.01*I2 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
ISEF< Current 45 0B Courier Number (Current) 42108 G2 0.02 Setting 0.001*I3 0.8*I3 0.0005*I3 2 * * *
BLOCKED O/C 45 0C (Sub Heading) * Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
CBF Blocks I> 45 0D Indexed String G37 42109 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
CBF Blocks IN> 45 0E Indexed String G37 42110 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
GROUP 1 46 00 * * *
SUPERVISION
VT SUPERVISION 46 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
VTS Status 46 02 Indexed String G7 42150 G7 Blocking Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Reset Mode 46 03 Indexed String G69 42151 G69 Manual Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Time Delay 46 04 Courier Number (Time) 42152 G2 5 Setting 1 10 0.1 2 * * *
VTS I> Inhibit 46 05 Courier Number (Current) 42153 G2 10 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
VTS I2> Inhibit 46 06 Courier Number (Current) 42154 G2 0.05 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
CT SUPERVISION 46 07 (Sub Heading) * * *
CTS Status 46 08 Indexed String G37 42155 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN Input 46 09 Indexed String G49 42156 G49 Derived Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN< Inhibit 46 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 42157 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 22*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * *
CTS IN> Set 46 0B Courier Number (Current) 42158 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
CTS Time Delay 46 0C Courier Number (Time) 42159 G2 5 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1 4A 00 * * *
INPUT LABELS
Opto Input 1 4A 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42300 42307 G3 L1 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 2 4A 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42308 42315 G3 L2 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Page 37 of 82
Opto Input 3 4A 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42316 42323 G3 L3 Block IN>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Appendix A
L3 Block IN>2 * *
TG8614A
Volume 1
Opto Input 4 4A 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42324 42331 G3 L4 Block I>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
L4 Block I>2 * *
Opto Input 5 4A 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42332 42339 G3 L5 Reset Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Opto Input 6 4A 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42340 42347 G3 L6 Ext Prot Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 7 4A 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42348 42355 G3 L7 52a Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 8 4A 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42356 42363 G3 L8 52b Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 9 4A 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42364 42371 G3 L9 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 10 4A 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42372 42379 G3 L10 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 11 4A 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42380 42387 G3 L11 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 12 4A 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42388 42395 G3 L12 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 13 4A 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42396 42403 G3 L13 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 14 4A 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42404 42411 G3 L14 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 15 4A 0F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42412 42419 G3 L15 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 16 4A 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42420 42427 G3 L16 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1 4B 00 * * *
OUTPUT LABELS
Relay 1 4B 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42450 42457 G3 R1 IN>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R1 Trip CB * *
Relay 2 4B 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42458 42465 G3 R2 I>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R2 Trip PrimeMov * *
Relay 3 4B 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42466 42473 G3 R3 Any Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 4 4B 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42474 42481 G3 R4 General Alarm Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 5 4B 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42482 42489 G3 R5 CB Fail Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 6 4B 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42490 42497 G3 R6 Control Close Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R6 E/F Trip * *
Relay 7 4B 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42498 42505 G3 R7 Control Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R7 V or F Trip *
Page 38 of 82
R7 Volt Trip *
Appendix A
Relay 8 4B 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42506 42513 G3 R8 Freq Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
TG8614A
Volume 1
Relay 9 4B 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42514 42521 G3 R9 Diff Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 10 4B 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42522 42529 G3 R10 SysBack Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Relay 11 4B 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42530 42537 G3 R11 NPS Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 12 4B 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42538 42545 G3 R12 Ffail Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 13 4B 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42546 42553 G3 R13 Power Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 14 4B 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42554 42561 G3 R14 V/Hz Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1 4C 00 * * 0927=1 AND 091F=1 AND
RTD LABELS “0006=””P34????B*”””
RTD 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42750 42757 G3 RTD 1 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42822 42829 G3 RTD 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS ** *
Repeat of Group 1 50 00 43000 44999 * * *
Repeat of Group 1 70 00 45000 46999 * * *
Repeat of Group 1 90 00 47000 48999 * * *
Page 39 of 82
(No Header) N/A B0 00 Auto extraction Event Record Column * * *
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Select Record B0 01 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Setting 0 65535 1 * * * Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
Faulted Phase B0 02 Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String G16 G16 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Start Elements1 B0 03 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG84 G84 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Start Elements2 B0 04 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG107 G107 Data * * *
Trip Elements1 B0 05 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG85 G85 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Tripped Elements2 B0 06 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG86 G86 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Fault Alarms B0 07 Binary Flag (32 Bits) Indexed StringG87 G87 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Fault Time B0 08 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Active Group B0 09 Unsigned Integer Data * * *
System Frequency B0 0A Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *
Fault Duration B0 0B Courier Number (time) Data * * *
CB Operate Time B0 0C Courier Number (time) Data * * *
Relay Trip Time B0 0D Courier Number (time) Data * * *
IA B0 0E Courier Number (current) Data * *
IA-1 *
IB B0 0F Courier Number (current) Data * *
IB-1 *
IC B0 10 Courier Number (current) Data * *
IC-1 *
VAB B0 11 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBC B0 12 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCA B0 13 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VAN B0 14 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBN B0 15 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCN B0 16 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
Page 40 of 82
IA-2 B0 17 Courier Number (current) Data *
Appendix A
TG8614A
IB-2 B0 18 Courier Number (current) Data *
Volume 1
IC-2 B0 19 Courier Number (current) Data *
IA Differential B0 1A Courier Number (Current) Data *

MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
B Differential B0 1B Courier Number (Current) Data *
IC Differential B0 1C Courier Number (Current) Data *
VN Measured B0 1D Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
VN Derived B0 1E Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
IN Measured B0 1F Courier Number (Voltage) Data * *
IN Derived B0 1F Courier Number (Current) Data *
IN Sensitive B0 20 Courier Number (Current) Data * * *
IREF Diff B0 21 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
IREF Bias B0 22 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
I2 B0 23 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
3 Phase Watts B0 24 Courier Number (Watts) Data * * *
3 Phase VARs B0 25 Courier Number (VARs) Data * * *
3 Phase Power Factor B0 26 Courier Number (No unit) Data * * *
RTD 1 B0 27 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 4 B0 2A Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 5 B0 2B Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 6 B0 2C Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 7 B0 2D Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 8 B0 2E Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
RTD 9 B0 2F Courier Number (Temperature) Data * *
Page 41 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
df/dt B0 31 Courier Number (Hz/s) Data *
Volume 1
V Vector Shift B0 32 Courier Number (Angle) Data *
No Header) N/A B1 00 Auto extraction Maintenance

Record Column * * * Menu Text UI Menu Text UI
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Courier Modbus Address Modbus Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Comment
Select Record B1 01 UINT16 Setting 0 65535 1 * * *
Time and Date B1 02 IEC Date and Time Data * * *
Record Text B1 03 ASCII Text (32 chars) Data * * *
Record Type B1 04 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
Record Data B1 05 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
(No Header) N/A B2 00 Data Transfer
Domain B2 04 Indexed String G57 PSL Settings Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sub-Domain B2 08 Indexed String G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Version B2 0C Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) 256 Setting 0 65535 1 2 * * *
Start B2 10 Not Used * * *
Length B2 14 Not Used * * *
Reference B2 18 Not Used * * *
Transfer Mode B2 1C Unsigned Integer Indexed StringsG76 G76 6 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Data Transfer B2 20 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers Setting * * * Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
(No Header) N/A B3 00 Disturbance Recorder Control * * *
UNUSED B3 01 * * *
Recorder Source B3 02 Indexed String 0 0 Samples Data * * *
(No Header) N/A B4 00 Disturbance Record Extraction * * *
Select Record B4 01 Unsigned Integer 0 Setting -199 199 1 0 * * *
Trigger Time B4 02 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Format B4 0A Unsigned Integer 1 Data * * *
Upload B4 0B Unsigned Integer Data * * *

30800 G1 Data * * * Number of Disturbance Records (0 to
Page 42 of 82
200)
30801 G1 Data * * * Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to
Appendix A
65535)
TG8614A
Volume 1
30802 G1 Data * * * Number of Registers in Current Page
30803 30929 G1 Data * * * Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535)
40250 G1 Setting 1 65535 1 2 * * * Select Disturbance Record
30930 30933 G12 Data * * * Timestamp of selected record
MiCOM P342, P343
TECHNICAL GUIDE
COMMS SYS DATA N/A BF 00 * * *
Dist Record Cntrl Ref BF 01 Menu Cell(2) B300 Data * * * Disturbance Record Control reference
Dist Record Extract Ref BF 02 Menu Cell(2) B400 Data * * * Disturbance Record Extraction Reference
Setting Transfer BF 03 Unsigned Integer Setting * * *
Reset Demand BF 04 None (Reset Menu Cell) Data(but supports Reset Menu cell) * * * Reset Measurements Demand values
UNUSED BF 05 * * *
Block Xfer Ref BF 06 Menu Cell(2) B200 Data * * * Block Transfer Reference
Page 43 of 82
Appendix A
TG8614A
Volume 1
Page 44 of 82
Data types and indexed string settings

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION
G1 1 Register UNSIGNED INTEGER
Range 0 to 65535
G2 1 Register NUMERIC SETTING

Value = (Setting - Minimum) / Step Size
G3 Variable number of Registers ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS

0x00FF Second character
0xFF00 First character
G4 2 Registers PLANT STATUS

“(Second reg, First Reg)”
“0x0000,0x0001” “CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0002” “CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0004” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0008” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0010” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0020” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0040” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0080” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0100” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0200” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0400” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0800” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x1000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x2000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x4000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x8000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0001,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0002,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0004,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0008,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0010,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0020,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0040,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0080,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0100,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0200,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0400,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0800,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x1000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x2000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x4000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x8000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
G5 2 Registers CONTROL STATUS

“0x0000,0x0001” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0002” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0004” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0008” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0010” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0020” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0040” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
Page 45 of 82

“0x0000,0x0080” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0100” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0200” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0400” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x0800” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x1000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x2000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x4000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0000,0x8000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0001,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0002,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0004,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0008,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0010,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0020,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0040,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0080,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0100,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0200,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0400,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x0800,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x1000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x2000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x4000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
“0x8000,0x0000” “Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)”
G6 1 Register RECORD CONTROL COMMAND REGISTER

0 No operation
1 Clear Event records
2 Clear Fault Record
3 Clear Maintenance Records
4 Reset Indications
G7 VTS INDICATE / BLOCK

0 Blocking
1 Indication
G8 1 Register LOGIC INPUT STATUS

0x0001 “Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)”
0x0100 “Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)” P343 only
Page 46 of 82

G9 RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
“0x0000,0x0001” “Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)”
“0x0000,0x0080” “Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)” P343 only
“0x0000,0x4000” “Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)” Not Used
G10 1 Register “Signed fixed point number, 1 decimal place”

Range -3276.8 to 3276.7
G11 YES/NO
0 No
1 Yes
G12 4 registers TIME AND DATE

This will take the IEC 870 format
0x007F First register - Years
0x0FFF Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x9FBF Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0xFFFF Fourth Register - Milli-seconds
G13 EVENT RECORD TYPE (MODBUS)
0 Latched alarm active
1 Latched alarm inactive
2 Self reset alarm active
3 Self reset alarm inactive
4 Relay event
5 Opto event
6 Protection event
7 Platform event
8 Fault logged event
9 Maintenance record logged event
G14 I> FUNCTION LINK “(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional)”

Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block P341 only
Bit 4 Not Used
Page 47 of 82

Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G15 DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS

0 No Record
1 Unextracted
2 Extracted
G16 FAULTED PHASE

0x0001 Start A
0x0002 Start B
0x0004 Start C
0x0008 Start N
0x0010 Trip A
0x0020 Trip B
0x0040 Trip C
0x0080 Trip N
G17 IRIG-B STATUS

0 Card not fitted
1 Card failed
2 Signal healthy
3 No signal
G18 RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER

0 No Operation
1 Select next event
2 Accept Event
3 Select next Disurbance Record
4 Accept disturbance record
5 Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 LANGUAGE
0 English
1 Francais
2 Deutsch
3 Espanol
G20 “(Second reg, First Reg)” PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS)

“0x0000, 0x00FF” First password character
“0x0000, 0xFF00” Second password character
“0x00FF, 0x0000” Third password character
“0xFF00, 0x0000” Fourth password character
NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL
“ALWAYS INDICATE AN “”*”” IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE “
THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
G21 IEC870 INTERFACE

0 RS485
1 Fibre Optic
G22 PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL

0 Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2.
1 Level 1 - Password required for level 2.
2 Level 2 - No passwords required.
Page 48 of 82

G23 VOLTAGE AND V/HZ CURVE SELECTION
0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IDMT
G24 2 Registers “UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES”

High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25 1 Register “UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES”

Example 50.050 stored as 50050
Range -32.768 to 32.767
G26 RELAY STATUS

0x0001 Event
0x0002 Disturbance
0x0004 Alarm
0x0008 Trip
0x0010 Out of Service
0x0020 Plant
0x0040 Control
0x0080 Unused
0x0100 Unused
0x0200 Unused
0x0400 Unused
0x0800 Unused
0x1000 Unused
0x2000 Unused
0x4000 Unused
0x8000 Unused
G27 2 REGISTERS UNSIGNED LONG VALUE

High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Range -2.147E9 to 2.147E9
G28 1 REGISTER SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS

Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary)
Range -32768 to 32767
G29 3 REGISTER POWER MULTIPLER

All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a
2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27
Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary)
For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110
For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
Range -1.40E14 to 1.40E14
G30 1 REGISTER “SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES”

Range -327.68 to 327.67
Page 49 of 82

G31 ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
P341 P342 P343
0 VAN VAN VAN
1 VBN VBN VBN
2 VCN VCN VCN
3 VN VN VN
4 IA IA IA-1
5 IB IB IB-1
6 IC IC IC-1
7 IN Sensitive IN IN
8 IN Sensitive IN Sensitive
9 IA-2
10 IB-2
11 IC-2
G32 DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (See DDB)

P341 P342 P343
0 Unused Unused Unused
1 R1 IN>1 Start R1 Trip CB R1 Trip CB
2 R2 I>1 Start R2 Trip PrimeMov R2 Trip PrimeMov
3 R3 Any Trip R3 Any Trip R3 Any Trip
4 R4 General Alarm R4 General Alarm R4 General Alarm
5 R5 CB Fail R5 CB Fail R5 CB Fail
6 R6 Control Close R6 E/F trip R6 E/F Trip
7 R7 Control Trip R7 V or F Trip R7 Volt Trip
8 L1 Setting group L1 Setting Group R8 Freq Trip
9 L2 Setting group L2 Setting Group R9 Diff Trip
10 L3 Block IN>3&4 L3 Block IN>2 R10 SysBack Trip
11 L4 Block I> 3&4 L4 Block I>2 R11 NPS Trip
12 L5 Reset L5 Reset R12 Ffail Trip
13 L6 Ext Prot Trip L6 Ext Prot Trip R13 Power trip
14 L7 52a L7 52a R14 V/Hz trip
15 L8 52b L8 52b L1 Setting Group
16 LED 1 LED 1 L2 Setting Group
17 LED 2 LED 2 L3 Block IN>2
18 LED 3 LED 3 L4 Block I>2
19 LED 4 LED 4 L5 Reset
20 LED 5 LED 5 L6 Ext Prot Trip
21 LED 6 LED 6 L7 52a
22 LED 7 LED 7 L8 52b
23 LED 8 LED 8 L9 Not Used
24 SG-opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid L10 Not Used
25 Prot’n Disabled Prot’n Disabled L11 Not Used
26 VT Fail Alarm VT Fail Alarm L12 Not Used
27 CT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm L13 Not Used
28 CB Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm L14 Not Used
29 I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Alarm L15 Not Used
30 I^ Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm L16 Not Used
31 CB Ops Maint CB Ops Maint LED 1
32 CB Ops Lockout CB Ops Lockout LED 2
33 CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Maint LED 3
34 CB Op Time Lock CB Op Time Lock LED 4
35 Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Lock LED 5
36 CB Status Alarm CB Status Alarm LED 6
37 Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Trip Fail LED 7
Page 50 of 82

38 Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Cls Fail LED 8
39 Man CB Unhealthy Man CB Unhealthy SG-opto Invalid
40 F out of range NPS Alarm Prot’n Disabled
41 Freq Prot Alm V/Hz Alarm VT Fail Alarm
42 Voltage Prot Alm Field Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm
43 User Alarm 1 RTD Thermal Alm CB Fail Alarm
44 User Alarm 2 RTD Open Cct I^ Maint Alarm
45 User Alarm 3 RTD short Cct I^ Lockout Alarm
46 User Alarm 4 RTD Data Error CB Ops Maint
47 df/dt Trip RTD Board Fail CB Ops Lockout
48 V Shift Trip Freq Prot Alm CB Op Time Maint
49 IN>1 Trip Voltage Prot Alm CB Op Time Lock
50 IN>2 Trip User Alarm 1 Fault Freq Lock
51 IN>3 Trip User Alarm 2 CB Status Alarm
52 IN>4 Trip User Alarm 3 Man CB Trip Fail
53 IREF> Trip User Alarm 4 Man CB Cls Fail
54 ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip Man CB Unhealthy
55 ISEF>2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip NPS Alarm
56 ISEF>3 Trip NPS Trip V/Hz Alarm
57 ISEF>4 Trip Sys Back Trip Field Fail Alarm
58 VN>1 Trip Sys Back Trip A RTD Thermal Alm
59 VN>2 Trip Sys Back Trip B RTD Open Cct
60 V<1 Trip Sys Back Trip C RTD short Cct
61 V<1 Trip A/AB V/Hz Trip RTD Data Error
62 V<1 Trip B/BC RTD 1 Trip RTD Board Fail
63 V<1 Trip C/CA RTD 2 Trip Freq Prot Alm
64 V<2 Trip RTD 3 Trip Voltage Prot Alm
65 V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 4 Trip User Alarm 1
66 V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 5 Trip User Alarm 2
67 V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 6 Trip User Alarm 3
68 V>1 Trip RTD 7 Trip User Alarm 4
69 V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 8 Trip 100% ST EF Trip
70 V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 9 Trip DeadMachine trip
71 V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 10 Trip Gen Diff Trip
72 V>2 Trip Any RTD Trip Gen Diff Trip A
73 V>2 Trip A/AB IN>1 Trip Gen Diff Trip B
74 V>2 Trip B/BC IN>2 Trip Gen Diff Trip C
75 V>2 Trip C/CA IREF> Trip Field Fail1 Trip
76 F<1 Trip ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip
77 F<2 Trip VN>1 Trip NPS Trip
78 F<3 Trip VN>2 Trip Sys Back Trip
79 F<4 Trip V<1 Trip Sys Back Trip A
80 F>1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB Sys Back Trip B
81 F>2 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC Sys Back Trip C
82 Power1 Trip V<1 Trip C/CA V/Hz Trip
83 Power2 Trip V<2 Trip RTD 1 Trip
84 I>1 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 2 Trip
85 I>1 Trip A V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 3 Trip
86 I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 4 Trip
87 I>1 Trip C V>1 Trip RTD 5 Trip
88 I>2 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 6 Trip
89 I>2 Trip A V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 7 Trip
90 I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 8 Trip
91 I>2 Trip C V>2 Trip RTD 9 Trip
92 I>3 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB RTD 10 Trip
Page 51 of 82

93 I>3 Trip A V>2 Trip B/BC Any RTD Trip
94 I>3 Trip B V>2 Trip C/CA IN>1 Trip
95 I>3 Trip C F<1 Trip IN>2 Trip
96 I>4 Trip F<2 Trip IREF> Trip
97 I>4 Trip A F<3 Trip ISEF>1 Trip
98 I>4 Trip B F<4 Trip VN>1 Trip
99 I>4 Trip C F>1 Trip VN>2 Trip
100 Any Start F>2 Trip V<1 Trip
101 VN>1 Start Power1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB
102 VN>2 Start Power2 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC
103 V<1 Start I>1 Trip V<1 Trip C/CA
104 V<1 Start A/AB I>1 Trip A V<2 Trip
105 V<1 Start B/BC I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip A/AB
106 V<1 Start C/CA I>1 Trip C V<2 Trip B/BC
107 V<2 Start I>2 Trip V<2 Trip C/CA
108 V<2 Start A/AB I>2 Trip A V>1 Trip
109 V<2 Start B/BC I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip A/AB
110 V<2 Start C/CA I>2 Trip C V>1 Trip B/BC
111 V>1 Start Any Start V>1 Trip C/CA
112 V>1 Start A/AB VN>1 Start V>2 Trip
113 V>1 Start B/BC VN>2 Start V>2 Trip A/AB
114 V>1 Start C/CA V<1 Start V>2 Trip B/BC
115 V>2 Start V<1 Start A/AB V>2 Trip C/CA
116 V>2 Start A/AB V<1 Start B/BC F<1 Trip
117 V>2 Start B/BC V<1 Start C/CA F<2 Trip
118 V>2 Start C/CA V<2 Start F<3 Trip
119 Power1 Start V<2 Start A/AB F<4 Trip
120 Power2 Start V<2 Start B/BC F>1 Trip
121 I>1 Start V<2 Start C/CA F>2 Trip
122 I>1 Start A V>1 Start Power1 Trip
123 I>1 Start B V>1 Start A/AB Power2 Trip
124 I>1 Start C V>1 Start B/BC I>1 Trip
125 I>2 Start V>1 Start C/CA I>1 Trip A
126 I>2 Start A V>2 Start I>1 Trip B
127 I>2 Start B V>2 Start A/AB I>1 Trip C
128 I>2 Start C V>2 Start B/BC I>2 Trip
129 I>3 Start V>2 Start C/CA I>2 Trip A
130 I>3 Start A Power1 Start I>2 Trip B
131 I>3 Start B Power2 Start I>2 Trip C
132 I>3 Start C I>1 Start Any Start
133 I>4 Start I>1 Start A VN>1 Start
134 I>4 Start A I>1 Start B VN>2 Start
135 I>4 Start B I>1 Start C V<1 Start
136 I>4 Start C I>2 Start V<1 Start A/AB
137 IN>1 Start I>2 Start A V<1 Start B/BC
138 IN>2 Start I>2 Start B V<1 Start C/CA
139 IN>3 Start I>2 Start C V<2 Start
140 IN>4 Start IN>1 Start V<2 Start A/AB
141 ISEF>1 Start IN>2 Start V<2 Start B/BC
142 ISEF>2 Start ISEF>1 Start V<2 Start C/CA
143 ISEF>3 Start F<1 Start V>1 Start
144 ISEF>4 Start F<2 Start V>1 Start A/AB
145 F<1 Start F<3 Start V>1 Start B/BC
146 F<2 Start F<4 Start V>1 Start C/CA
147 F<3 Start F>1 Start V>2 Start
Page 52 of 82

148 F<4 Start F>2 Start V>2 Start A/AB
149 F>1 Start VTS Fast Block V>2 Start B/BC
150 F>2 Start VTS Slow Block V>2 Start C/CA
151 VTS Fast Block CTS Block Power1 Start
152 VTS Slow Block Bfail1 Trip 3ph Power2 Start
153 CTS Block Bfail2 Trip 3ph I>1 Start
154 Bfail1 Trip 3ph IA< Start I>1 Start A
155 Bfail2 Trip 3ph IB< Start I>1 Start B
156 Control Trip IC< Start I>1 Start C
157 Control Close ISEF< Start I>2 Start
158 Close in Prog IN< Start I>2 Start A
159 Reconnection V/Hz Start I>2 Start B
160 I> BlockStart FFail1 Start I>2 Start C
161 IN/SEF>Blk Start FFail2 Start IN>1 Start
162 df/dt Start Sys Back Start IN>2 Start
163 IA< Start Sys Back Start A ISEF>1 Start
164 IB< Start Sys Back Start B 100% ST EF Start
165 IC< Start Sys Back Start C F<1 Start
166 ISEF< Start RTD 1 Alarm F<2 Start
167 Lockout Alarm RTD 2 Alarm F<3 Start
168 CB Open 3 ph RTD 3 Alarm F<4 Start
169 CB Closed 3 ph RTD 4 Alarm F>1 Start
170 Field Volts Fail RTD 5 Alarm F>2 Start
171 RTD 6 Alarm VTS Fast Block
172 RTD 7 Alarm VTS Slow Block
173 RTD 8 Alarm CTS Block
174 RTD 9 Alarm Bfail1 Trip 3ph
175 RTD 10 Alarm Bfail2 Trip 3ph
176 Lockout Alarm IA< Start
177 CB Open 3 ph IB< Start
178 CB Closed 3 ph IC< Start
179 Field Volts Fail ISEF< Start
180 IN< Start
181 V/Hz Start
182 FFail1 Start
183 FFail2 Start
184 Sys Back Start
185 Sys Back Start A
186 Sys Back Start B
187 Sys Back Start C
188 RTD 1 Alarm
189 RTD 2 Alarm
190 RTD 3 Alarm
191 RTD 4 Alarm
192 RTD 5 Alarm
193 RTD 6 Alarm
194 RTD 7 Alarm
195 RTD 8 Alarm
196 RTD 9 Alarm
197 RTD 10 Alarm
198 Lockout Alarm
199 CB Open 3 ph
200 CB Closed 3 ph
201 Field Volts Fail
Page 53 of 82

G34 TRIGGER MODE
0 Single
1 Extended
G35 Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers)

Number of steps from minimum value
expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G37 ENABLED / DISABLED

0 Disabled
1 Enabled
G38 COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE

0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G39 COMMUNICATIONS PARITY

0 Odd
1 Even
2 None
G43 IDMT CURVE TYPE

0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IEC S Inverse
3 IEC V Inverse
4 IEC E Inverse
5 UK LT Inverse
6 IEEE M Inverse
7 IEEE V Inverse
8 IEEE E Inverse
9 US Inverse
10 US ST Inverse
G44 DIRECTION
0 Non-Directional
1 Directional Fwd
2 Directional Rev
G46 POLARISATION
0 Zero Sequence
1 Neg Sequence
G47 MEASURING MODE

0 Phase-Phase
1 Phase-Neutral
G48 OPERATION MODE

0 Any Phase
1 Three Phase
G49 VN OR IN INPUT
0 Measured
1 Derived
Page 54 of 82

G50 RTD SELECT
0x0001 RTD Input 1
0x0002 RTD Input 2
0x0004 RTD Input 3
0x0008 RTD Input 4
0x0010 RTD Input 5
0x0020 RTD Input 6
0x0040 RTD Input 7
0x0080 RTD Input 8
0x0100 RTD Input 9
0x0200 RTD Input 10
G52 DEFAULT DISPLAY

0 3Ph + N Current
1 3Ph Voltage
2 Power
3 Date and Time
4 Description
5 Plant Reference
6 Frequency
7 Access Level
G53 SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS

0 No Operation
1 All Settings
2 Setting Group 1
3 Setting Group 2
4 Setting Group 3
5 Setting Group 4
G54 SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS

0 Primary
1 Secondary
G55 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL

0 No Operation
1 Trip
2 Close
G56 PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE

0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 IA
4 IB
5 IC
G57 Data Transfer Domain

0 PSL Settings
1 PSL Configuration
G58 SEF/REF SELECTION

0 SEF
1 Wattmetric
2 Hi Z REF
Page 55 of 82

3 Lo Z REF P342 and P343 only
4 Lo Z REF+SEF P342 and P343 only
5 Lo Z REF+Wattmet P342 and P343 only
G59 BATTERY STATUS

0 Dead
1 Healthy
G60 Time Delay Selection

0 DT
1 Inverse
G61 ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL

0 Select via Menu
1 Select via Opto
G62 SAVE AS
0 No Operation
1 Save
2 Abort
G63 IN> FUNCTION LINK “(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional)”

Bit 0 IN>1 VTS Block P341 only
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G64 ISEF> FUNCTION LINK “(Note: 1=Block, 0=Non Directional)”

Bit 0 ISEF>1 VTS Block
Bit 1 ISEF>2 VTS Block P341 only
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G65 F< FUNCTION LINK

Bit 0 F<1 Poledead Blk
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G66 MESSAGE FORMAT

0 No Trigger
1 Trigger L/H
2 Trigger H/L
Page 56 of 82

G68 CB Fail Reset Options
0 I< Only
1 CB Open & I<
2 Prot Reset & I<
G69 VTS RESET MODE

0 Manual
1 Auto
G71 PROTOCOL
0 Courier
1 IEC870-5-103
2 Modbus
G76 TRANSFER MODE

0 Prepare Rx
1 Complete Rx
2 Prepare Tx
3 Complete Tx
4 Rx Prepared
5 Tx Prepared
6 OK
7 Error
G79 CUSTOM SETTINGS

0 Disabled
1 Basic
2 Complete
G80 VISIBLE / INVISIBLE

0 Invisible
1 Visible
G81 RESET LOCKOUT BY

0 User Interface
1 CB Close
G84 Modbus value+bit position START ELEMENTS 1
“0x0000,0x0001” General Start
“0x0000,0x0002” Start Power1
“0x0000,0x0004” Start Power2
“0x0000,0x0008” Start FFail1 P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0010” Start FFail2 P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0020” Start Sys Back P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0040” Start I>1
“0x0000,0x0080” Start I>2
“0x0000,0x0100” Start I>3 P341 only
“0x0000,0x0200” Start I>4 P341 only
“0x0000,0x0400” Start IN>1
“0x0000,0x0800” Start IN>2
“0x0000,0x1000” Start IN>3 P341 only
“0x0000,0x2000” Start IN>4 P341 only
“0x0000,0x4000” Start ISEF>1
“0x0000,0x8000” Start ISEF>2 P341 only
Page 57 of 82

“0x0004,0x0000” Start NVD VN>1
“0x0008,0x0000” Start NVD VN>2
“0x0010,0x0000” Start 100% ST EF P343 only
“0x0020,0x0000”
“0x0040,0x0000”
“0x0080,0x0000”
“0x0100,0x0000”
“0x0200,0x0000”
“0x0400,0x0000”
“0x0800,0x0000”
“0x1000,0x0000”
“0x2000,0x0000”
“0x4000,0x0000”
“0x8000,0x0000”
G85 Modbus value+bit position TRIP ELEMENTS 1

“0x0000,0x0001” Any Trip
“0x0000,0x0002” Trip Gen Diff P343 only
“0x0000,0x0004” Trip Power1
“0x0000,0x0008” Trip Power2
“0x0000,0x0010” Trip FFail1 P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0020” Trip FFail2 P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0040” Trip NPS P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0080” Trip Sys Back P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0100” Trip I>1
“0x0000,0x0200” Trip I>2
“0x0000,0x0400” Trip I>3 P431 only
“0x0000,0x0800” Trip I>4 P431 only
“0x0000,0x1000” Trip IN>1
“0x0000,0x2000” Trip IN>2
“0x0000,0x4000” Trip IN>3 P431 only
“0x0000,0x8000” Trip IN>4 P431 only
“0x0001,0x0000” Trip ISEF>1
“0x0002,0x0000” Trip ISEF>2 P431 only
“0x0010,0x0000” Trip IREF>
“0x0020,0x0000” Trip NVD VN>1
“0x0040,0x0000” Trip NVD VN>2
“0x0080,0x0000” Trip 100% ST EF P343 only
“0x0100,0x0000” Trip Dead Mach P343 only
“0x0200,0x0000”
“0x0400,0x0000”
“0x0800,0x0000”
“0x1000,0x0000”
“0x2000,0x0000”
“0x4000,0x0000”
“0x8000,0x0000”
G86 Bit Description TRIP ELEMENTS 2

“0x0000,0x0001” Trip V<1
“0x0000,0x0002” Trip V<2
Page 58 of 82

“0x0000,0x0004” Trip V< A/AB
“0x0000,0x0008” Trip V< B/BC
“0x0000,0x0010” Trip V< C/CA
“0x0000,0x0020” Trip V>1
“0x0000,0x0040” Trip V>2
“0x0000,0x0080” Trip V> A/AB
“0x0000,0x0100” Trip V> B/BC
“0x0000,0x0200” Trip V> C/CA
“0x0000,0x0400” Trip F<1
“0x0000,0x0800” Trip F<2
“0x0000,0x1000” Trip F<3
“0x0000,0x2000” Trip F<4
“0x0000,0x4000” Trip F>1
“0x0000,0x8000” Trip F>2
“0x0001,0x0000” Trip V/Hz P342 and P343 only
“0x0002,0x0000” Trip df/dt P341 only
“0x0004,0x0000” Trip V Shift P341 only
“0x0008,0x0000” Trip RTD 1 P342 and P343 only
“0x2000,0x0000”
“0x4000,0x0000”
“0x8000,0x0000”
G87 Bit Description FAULT ALARMS

“0x0000,0x0001” CB Fail 1
“0x0000,0x0002” CB Fail 2
“0x0000,0x0004” VTS
“0x0000,0x0008” CTS
“0x0000,0x0010” Alarm FFail P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0020” Alarm NPS P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0040” Alarm V/Hz P342 and P343 only
“0x0000,0x0080” Alarm RTD 1 P342 and P343 only
“0x0002,0x0000”
“0x0004,0x0000”
“0x0008,0x0000”
“0x0010,0x0000”
“0x0020,0x0000”
Page 59 of 82

“0x0040,0x0000”
“0x0080,0x0000”
“0x0100,0x0000”
“0x0200,0x0000”
“0x0400,0x0000”
“0x0800,0x0000”
“0x1000,0x0000”
“0x2000,0x0000”
“0x4000,0x0000”
“0x8000,0x0000”
G88 ALARMS
0 Alarm Disabled
1 Alarm Enabled
G90 GROUP SELECTION

0 Group 1
1 Group 2
2 Group 3
3 Group 4
G93 COMMISSION TEST

0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
2 Remove Test
G94 COMMISSION TEST

0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
G95 SYSTEM FUNCTION LINKS

Bit 0 Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset)
Bit 1 Not Used
Bit 2 Not Used
Bit 3 Not used
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G96 Bit Position ALARM INDEXED STRINGS

0 Battery Fail
1 Field Volt Fail
2 SG-opto Invalid
3 Prot’n Disabled
4 VT Fail Alarm
5 CTS Fail Alarm
6 CB Fail
7 I^ Maint Alarm
8 I^ Maint Lockout
9 CB OPs Maint
10 CB OPs Lock
11 CB Time Maint
12 CB Time Lockout
13 Fault Freq Lock
Page 60 of 82

14 CB Status Alarm
15 CB Trip Fail P341 only
16 CB Close Fail P341 only
17 Man CB Unhealthy P341 only
18 F out of Range P341 only
18 NPS Alarm P342 and P343 only
19 V/Hz Alarm P342 and P343 only
20 Field Fail Alarm P342 and P343 only
21 RTD Thermal Alm P342 and P343 only
22 RTD Open Cct P342 and P343 only
23 RTD short Cct P342 and P343 only
24 RTD Data Error P342 and P343 only
25 RTD Board Fail P342 and P343 only
26 Freq Prot Alm
27 Voltage Prot Alm
28 User Alarm 1
29 User Alarm 2
30 User Alarm 3
31 User Alarm 4
G98 COPY TO
0 No Operation
1 Group 1
2 Group 2
3 Group 3
4 Group 4
G99 CB CONTROL
0 Disabled
1 Local
2 Remote
3 Local+Remote
4 Opto
5 Opto+local
6 Opto+Remote
7 Opto+Rem+local
G101 GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION SELECT

0 Disabled
1 Percentage Bias
2 High Impedance
G102 POWER FUNCTION SELECT

0 Disabled
1 Reverse
2 Low Forward
3 Over
G103 SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT

0 Disabled
1 Underimpedance
2 Volt controlled
3 Volt restrained
Page 61 of 82

G104 SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION
0 None
1 Delta-Star
G105 DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION

0 Disabled
1 DT
G107 Modbus value+bit position START ELEMENTS 2

“0x0000,0x0001” Start V<1
“0x0000,0x0002” Start V<2
“0x0000,0x0004” Start V< A/AB
“0x0000,0x0008” Start V< B/BC
“0x0000,0x0010” Start V< C/CA
“0x0000,0x0020” Start V>1
“0x0000,0x0040” Start V>2
“0x0000,0x0080” Start V> A/AB
“0x0000,0x0100” Start V> B/BC
“0x0000,0x0200” Start V> C/CA
“0x0000,0x0400” Start F<1
“0x0000,0x0800” Start F<2
“0x0000,0x1000” Start F<3
“0x0000,0x2000” Start F<4
“0x0000,0x4000” Start F>1
“0x0000,0x8000” Start F>2
“0x0001,0x0000” Start V/Hz P342 and P343 only
“0x0002,0x0000” Start df/dt P341 only
“0x0004,0x0000”
“0x0008,0x0000”
“0x0010,0x0000”
“0x0020,0x0000”
“0x0040,0x0000”
“0x0080,0x0000”
“0x0100,0x0000”
“0x0200,0x0000”
“0x0400,0x0000”
“0x0800,0x0000”
“0x1000,0x0000”
“0x2000,0x0000”
“0x4000,0x0000”
“0x8000,0x0000”
G108 Bit position RTD OPEN CIRCUIT FLAGS

0 RTD 1 label
1 RTD 2 label
2 RTD 3 label
3 RTD 4 label
4 RTD 5 label
5 RTD 6 label
6 RTD 7 label
7 RTD 8 label
8 RTD 9 label
9 RTD 10 label
Page 62 of 82

G109 Bit position RTD SHORT CIRCUIT FLAGS
0 RTD 1 label
1 RTD 2 label
2 RTD 3 label
3 RTD 4 label
4 RTD 5 label
5 RTD 6 label
6 RTD 7 label
7 RTD 8 label
8 RTD 9 label
9 RTD 10 label
G110 Bit position RTD DATA ERROR

0 RTD 1 label
1 RTD 2 label
2 RTD 3 label
3 RTD 4 label
4 RTD 5 label
5 RTD 6 label
6 RTD 7 label
7 RTD 8 label
8 RTD 9 label
9 RTD 10 label
G111 IDMT CURVE TYPE

0 DT
1 IEC S Inverse
2 IEC V Inverse
3 IEC E Inverse
4 UK LT Inverse
5 IEEE M Inverse
6 IEEE V Inverse
7 IEEE E Inverse
8 US Inverse
9 US ST Inverse
G118 CB CONTROL LOGIC INPUT ASSIGNMENTS

0 None
1 52A
2 52B
Page 63 of 82
EVENT RECORD DATA FORMAT

Event Text Additional Event Description Modbus Courier P341 P342 P343
16 Chars Text Event Type Cell Ref Value
G13
Logic Inputs Change in Opto Input 5 0020 Binary Flag (8 bits) * *
Binary Flag (16 bits) *
Value contains new opto input status
Output Contacts Change in output contact status 4 0021 Binary Flag (7 bits) * *
Binary Flag (14 bits)
Value contains new output contact status
Alarm Events:
“Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF”
Battery Fail ON/OFF Battery Fail 2/3 0022 1 * * *
Field Volt Fail ON/OFF Field Voltage Fail 2/3 0022 2 * * *
SG-opto Invalid ON/OFF Setting Group via opto invalid 2/3 0022 3 * * *
Prot’n Disabled ON/OFF Protection Disabled 2/3 0022 4 * * *
VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF VTS Alarm 2/3 0022 5 * * *
CT Fail Alarm ON/OFF CTS Alarm 2/3 0022 6 * * *
CB Fail Alarm ON/OFF CB Trip Fail Protection 0/1 0022 7 * * *
I^ Maint Alarm ON/OFF Broken Current Maintenance Alarm 2/3 0022 8 * * *
I^ Lockout Alarm ON/OFF Broken Current Lockout Alarm 2/3 0022 9 * * *
CB Ops Maint ON/OFF No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm 2/3 0022 10 * * *
CB Ops Lockout ON/OFF No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout 2/3 0022 11 * * *
CB Op Time Maint ON/OFF CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm 2/3 0022 12 * * *
CB Op Time Lock ON/OFF CB Op Time Lockout Alarm 2/3 0022 13 * * *
Fault Freq Lock ON/OFF Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm 2/3 0022 14 * * *
CB Status Alarm ON/OFF CB Status Alarm 0/1 0022 15 * * *
Man CB Trip Fail ON/OFF CB Failed to Trip 0/1 0022 16 *
Man CB Cls Fail ON/OFF CB Failed to Close 0/1 0022 17 *
Man CB Unhealthy ON/OFF No Healthy Control Close 0/1 0023 18 *
F out of range ON/OFF Frequency out of range 2/3 0022 19 *
NPS Alarm ON/OFF Negative Phase Sequence Alarm 0/1 0022 19 * *
V/Hz Alarm ON/OFF Volts Per Hz Alarm 0/1 0022 20 * *
Field Fail Alarm ON/OFF Field failure Alarm (Latched) 0/1 0022 21 * *
RTD Thermal Alm ON/OFF RTD thermal Alarm (Latched) 0/1 0022 22 * *
RTD Open Cct ON/OFF RTD open circuit failure (Latched) 0/1 0022 23 * *
RTD short Cct ON/OFF RTD short circuit failure (Latched) 0/1 0022 24 * *
RTD Data Error ON/OFF RTD data inconsistency error (Latched) 0/1 0022 25 * *
RTD Board Fail ON/OFF RTD Board failure (Latched) 0/1 0022 26 * *
Freq Prot Alm ON/OFF User definable frequency protection alarm (Latched) 0/1 0022 27 * * *
Voltage Prot Alm ON/OFF User definable voltage protection alarm (Latched) 0/1 0022 28 * * *
User Alarm 1 ON/OFF User Definable Alarm 1 (Latched) 0/1 0022 29 * * *
User Alarm 2 ON/OFF User Definable Alarm 2 (Latched) 0/1 0022 30 * * *
User Alarm 3 ON/OFF User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset) 2/3 0022 31 * * *
User Alarm 4 ON/OFF User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset) 2/3 0022 32 * * *
Protection Events:
“Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Bit 31 Direction 1=ON, 0 = OFF”
100% ST EF Trip ON/OFF 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 6 0023 178 *
DeadMachine trip ON/OFF Dead machine protection Trip 6 0023 179 *
Gen Diff Trip ON/OFF Generator Differential trip 3ph 6 0023 180 *
Gen Diff Trip A ON/OFF Generator Differential Trip A 6 0023 181 *
Gen Diff Trip B ON/OFF Generator Differential Trip B 6 0023 182 *
Gen Diff Trip C ON/OFF Generator Differential Trip C 6 0023 183 *
Field Fail1 Trip ON/OFF Field failure Stage 1 start 6 0023 184 * *
Field Fail2 Trip ON/OFF Field failure Stage 2 start 6 0023 185 * *
NPS Trip ON/OFF Negative Phase Sequence Trip 6 0023 186 * *
Sys Back Trip ON/OFF System Backup Trip 3ph 6 0023 187 * *
Sys Back Trip A ON/OFF System Backup Trip A 6 0023 188 * *
Page 64 of 82
G13
Sys Back Trip B ON/OFF System Backup Trip B 6 0023 189 * *
Sys Back Trip C ON/OFF System Backup Trip C 6 0023 190 * *
V/Hz Trip ON/OFF Volts per Hz Trip 6 0023 191 * *
RTD 1 Trip ON/OFF RTD 1 TRIP 6 0023 192 * *
df/dt Trip ON/OFF Rate of change of frequency Trip 6 0023 202 *
Any RTD Trip ON/OFF Any RTD Trip 6 0023 202 * *
V Shift Trip ON/OFF Voltage vector shift trip 6 0023 203 *
IN>1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage EF Trip 6 0023 204 * * *
IN>2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage EF Trip 6 0023 205 * * *
IN>3 Trip ON/OFF 3rd Stage EF Trip 6 0023 206 *
IN>4 Trip ON/OFF 4th Stage EF Trip 6 0023 207 *
IREF> Trip ON/OFF REF Trip 6 0023 208 * * *
ISEF>1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage SEF Trip 6 0023 209 * * *
ISEF>2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage SEF Trip 6 0023 210 *
ISEF>3 Trip ON/OFF 3rd Stage SEF Trip 6 0023 211 *
ISEF>4 Trip ON/OFF 4th Stage SEF Trip 6 0023 212 *
VN>1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 6 0023 213 * * *
VN>2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 6 0023 214 * * *
V<1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 6 0023 215 * * *
V<1 Trip A/AB ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 6 0023 216 * * *
V<1 Trip B/BC ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 6 0023 217 * * *
V<1 Trip C/CA ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 6 0023 218 * * *
V<2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 6 0023 219 * * *
V<2 Trip A/AB ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 6 0023 220 * * *
V<2 Trip B/BC ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 6 0023 221 * * *
V<2 Trip C/CA ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 6 0023 222 * * *
V>1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 6 0023 223 * * *
V>1 Trip A/AB ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 6 0023 224 * * *
V>1 Trip B/BC ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 6 0023 225 * * *
V>1 Trip C/CA ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 6 0023 226 * * *
V>2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 6 0023 227 * * *
V>2 Trip A/AB ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 6 0023 228 * * *
V>2 Trip B/BC ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 6 0023 229 * * *
V>2 Trip C/CA ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 6 0023 230 * * *
F<1 Trip ON/OFF Under frequency Stage 1 trip 6 0023 231 * * *
F>1 Trip ON/OFF Over frequency Stage 1 Trip 6 0023 235 * * *
F>2 Trip ON/OFF Over frequency Stage 2 Trip 6 0023 236 * * *
Power1 Trip ON/OFF Power stage 1 trip 6 0023 237 * * *
Power2 Trip ON/OFF Power stage 2 trip 6 0023 238 * * *
I>1 Trip ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 6 0023 239 * * *
I>1 Trip A ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Trip A 6 0023 240 * * *
I>1 Trip B ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Trip B 6 0023 241 * * *
I>1 Trip C ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Trip C 6 0023 242 * * *
Page 65 of 82
G13
I>2 Trip ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 6 0023 243 * * *
I>2 Trip A ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 6 0023 244 * * *
I>2 Trip B ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 6 0023 245 * * *
I>2 Trip C ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 6 0023 246 * * *
I>3 Trip ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 6 0023 247 *
I>3 Trip A ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 6 0023 248 *
I>3 Trip B ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 6 0023 249 *
I>3 Trip C ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 6 0023 250 *
I>4 Trip ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 6 0023 251 *
I>4 Trip A ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Trip A 6 0023 252 *
I>4 Trip B ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Trip B 6 0023 253 *
I>4 Trip C ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Trip C 6 0023 254 *
Any Start ON/OFF Any Start 6 0023 255 * * *
VN>1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 6 0023 256 * * *
VN>2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 6 0023 257 * * *
V<1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 6 0023 258 * * *
V<1 Start A/AB ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 6 0023 259 * * *
V<1 Start B/BC ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 6 0023 260 * * *
V<1 Start C/CA ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 6 0023 261 * * *
V<2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 6 0023 262 * * *
V<2 Start A/AB ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 6 0023 263 * * *
V<2 Start B/BC ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 6 0023 264 * * *
V<2 Start C/CA ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 6 0023 265 * * *
V>1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 6 0023 266 * * *
V>1 Start A/AB ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 6 0023 267 * * *
V>1 Start B/BC ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 6 0023 268 * * *
V>1 Start C/CA ON/OFF 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 6 0023 269 * * *
V>2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 6 0023 270 * * *
V>2 Start A/AB ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 6 0023 271 * * *
V>2 Start B/BC ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 6 0023 272 * * *
V>2 Start C/CA ON/OFF 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 6 0023 273 * * *
Power1 Start ON/OFF Power Stage 1 start 6 0023 274 * * *
Power2 Start ON/OFF Power stage 1 start 6 0023 275 * * *
I>1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 6 0023 276 * * *
I>1 Start A ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Start A 6 0023 277 * * *
I>1 Start B ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Start B 6 0023 278 * * *
I>1 Start C ON/OFF 1st Stage O/C Start C 6 0023 279 * * *
I>2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 6 0023 280 * * *
I>2 Start A ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Start A 6 0023 281 * * *
I>2 Start B ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Start B 6 0023 282 * * *
I>2 Start C ON/OFF 2nd Stage O/C Start C 6 0023 283 * * *
I>3 Start ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 6 0023 284 *
I>3 Start A ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Start A 6 0023 285 *
I>3 Start B ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Start B 6 0023 286 *
I>3 Start C ON/OFF 3rd Stage O/C Start C 6 0023 287 *
I>4 Start ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 6 0023 288 *
I>4 Start A ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Start A 6 0023 289 *
I>4 Start B ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Start B 6 0023 290 *
I>4 Start C ON/OFF 4th Stage O/C Start C 6 0023 291 *
IN>1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage EF#1 Start 6 0023 292 * * *
IN>2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage EF#1 Start 6 0023 293 * * *
IN>3 Start ON/OFF 3rd Stage EF#1 Start 6 0023 294 *
IN>4 Start ON/OFF 4th Stage EF#1 Start 6 0023 295 *
ISEF>1 Start ON/OFF 1st Stage SEF Start 6 0023 296 * * *
ISEF>2 Start ON/OFF 2nd Stage SEF Start 6 0023 297 *
Page 66 of 82
G13
ISEF>3 Start ON/OFF 3rd Stage SEF Start 6 0023 298 *
ISEF>4 Start ON/OFF 4th Stage SEF Start 6 0023 299 *
100% ST EF Start ON/OFF 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 6 0023 300 *
F<1 Start ON/OFF Under frequency Stage 1 START 6 0023 301 * * *
F>1 Start ON/OFF Over frequency Stage 1 START 6 0023 305 * * *
F>2 Start ON/OFF Over frequency Stage 2 START 6 0023 306 * * *
Bfail1 Trip 3ph ON/OFF tBF1 Trip 3Ph 6 0023 310 * * *
Bfail2 Trip 3ph ON/OFF tBF2 Trip 3Ph 6 0023 311 * * *
Control Trip ON/OFF Control Trip 6 0023 312 *
Control Close ON/OFF Control Close 6 0023 313 *
Close in Prog ON/OFF Control Close in Progress 6 0023 314 *
df/dt Start ON/OFF Rate of change of frequency Start 6 0023 318 *
V/Hz Start ON/OFF Volts per Hz Start 6 0023 324 * *
FFail1 Start ON/OFF Field failure Stage 1 start 6 0023 325 * *
FFail2 Start ON/OFF Field failure Stage 2 start 6 0023 326 * *
Sys Back Start ON/OFF System Backup Start 3Ph 6 0023 327 * *
Sys Back Start A ON/OFF System Backup Start A 6 0023 328 * *
Sys Back Start B ON/OFF System Backup Start B 6 0023 329 * *
Sys Back Start C ON/OFF System Backup Start C 6 0023 330 * *
RTD 1 Alarm ON/OFF RTD 1 Alarm 6 0023 331 * *
CB Open 3 ph ON/OFF 3 ph CB Open 6 0023 342 * * *
CB Closed 3 ph ON/OFF 3 ph CB Closed 6 0023 343 * * *
General Events Unsigned Integer (32 bits)
Alarms Cleared Relay Alarms Cleared 7 FFFF 0 * * *
Events Cleared Relay Event Records Cleared 7 0B01 1 * * *
Faults Cleared Relay Fault Records Cleared 7 0B02 2 * * *
Maint Cleared Relay Maintenance Records Cleared 7 0B03 3 * * *
PW Unlocked UI Control and Support Settings Changed 7 0002 4 * * *
PW Invalid UI Disturbance Recorder Settings Changed 7 0002 5 * * *
PW1 Modified UI Change to Protection Setting Group 1 7 0002 6 * * *
PW2 Modified UI Change to Protection Setting Group 2 7 0002 7 * * *
PW Expired UI Change to Protection Setting Group 3 7 0002 8 * * *
PW Unlocked F Change to Protection Setting Group 4 7 0002 9 * * *
PW Invalid F Active Group Selection Changed 7 0002 10 * * *
PW1 Modified F Password Unlocked via User Interface 7 0002 11 * * *
PW2 Modified F Invalid Password entered on User Interface 7 0002 12 * * *
PW Expired F Password unlock expired User Interface 7 0002 13 * * *
PW Unlocked R Password Unlocked via Front Port 7 0002 14 * * *
PW Invalid R Invalid Password entered on Front Port 7 0002 15 * * *
PW1 Modified R Password unlock expired Front Port 7 0002 16 * * *
PW2 Modified R Password Unlocked via Rear Port 7 0002 17 * * *
PW Expired R Invalid Password entered on Rear Port 7 0002 18 * * *
IRIG-B Active Password unlock expired Rear Port 7 0805 19 * * *
Page 67 of 82
G13
IRIG-B Inactive Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface 7 0805 20 * * *
Time Synch Password Level 1 Modified on Front Port 7 0801 21 * * *
C&S Changed Password Level 1 Modified on User Interface 7 FFFF 22 * * *
Dist Changed Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface 7 0904 23 * * *
Group 1 Changed Password Level 2 Modified on Front Port 7 0904 24 * * *
Group 2 Changed Password Level 2 Modified on User Interface 7 0904 25 * * *
Group 3 Changed IRIG-B Timesync Active (Valid Signal) 7 0904 26 * * *
Group 4 Changed IRIG-B Timesync Inactive (No Signal) 7 0904 27 * * *
Act Grp Changed Relay Clock Adjusted 7 0903 28 * * *
Indication Reset Relay Indications Reset 7 01FF 29 * * *
Power On Relay Powered Up 7 FFFF 30 * * *
Cell Ref Value Extraction Column Record Number

Fault Recorded Fault Records: 8 0100 0 B000 16bit UINT
Text Self Monitoring: Cell Ref Value Extraction Column Record Number
Maint Recorded Maintenance Records 9 FFFF 0 B100 16bit UINT
Maintenance Record Text: Description Continuous

Fast W’Dog Error Fast Watchdog Error * * *
Battery Failure Battery Failure * * * *
BBRAM Failure Battery Back RAM Failure * * * *
Field Volt Fail Field Voltage Failure * * * *
Bus Reset Error Bus Error * * *
Slow W’Dog Error Slow Watchdog Error * * *
SRAM Failure Bus SRAM Bus Failure * * * *
SRAM Failure Blk SRAM Block Failure * * * *
FLASH Failure Flash checksum Error * * * *
Code Verify Fail Software Code Verification Failure * * * *
EEPROM Failure EEPROM Failure * * * *
Software Failure Software Error * * * *
Hard Verify Fail Hardware Verification Error * * *
Non Standard General Error * * * *
Page 68 of 82
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability Compatability Level 2
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads 1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface (Order option)

Plastic Fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
Transmission speed
User Setting: 9600 or 19200
Application Layer
More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
Standard information numbers in monitor direction
ASDU TYP COT FUN INF Description GI Model Number Address Interpretation
P341 P342 P343
System Functions(Monitor)
8 10 255 0 End of General Interrogration ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
6 8 255 0 Time Syncronisation ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
5 3 224 2 Reset FCB ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
5 4 224 3 Reset CU ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
5 5 224 4 Start/Restart ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
5 6 224 5 Power On ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
“Note 1: Indenfication message in ASDU 5: ALSTOM, Software ref P34x.”
Note 2: The Function type is a settable quantity.
Status Indications
1 “1,7,9,11,12,20,21” 16 Auto-recloser active
1 “1,7,9,11,12,20,21” 17 Tele-protection active
1 “1,7,9,11,12,20,21” 18 Protection active
1 “1,7,9,11,12,20,21” 224 19 LED Reset ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Reset Indication
1 “9,11” 20 Monitor direction blocked
1 “9,11” 224 21 Test mode ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Protection Disabled
1 “9,11” 22 Local parameter setting
1 “1,7,9,11,12,20,21” 224 23 Characteristic 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Group 1 Active
1 “1,7,9,11” 224 27 Auxillary input 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Opto Input 1
1 “1,7,9,11” 224 27 Auxillary input 1 ✓ ✓ 2 Opto Input 9
Page 69 of 82
P341 P342 P343
Supervision Indications
1 “1,7,9” 32 Measurand supervision I
1 “1,7,9” 33 Measurand supervision V
1 “1,7,9” 35 Phase sequence supervision
1 “1,7,9” 36 Trip circuit supervision
1 “1,7,9” 37 I>> back-up supervision
1 “1,7,9” 224 38 VT fuse failure ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 VT Supervision Indication
1 “1,7,9” 39 Teleprotection disturbed
1 “1,7,9” 46 Group warning
1 “1,7,9” 47 Group alarm
Earth Fault Indications

1 “1,7,9” 48 Earth Fault L1
1 “1,7,9” 51 Earth Fault Fwd
1 “1,7,9” 52 Earth Fault Rev
Fault Indications
2 “1,7,9” 224 64 Start /pickup L1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 A Phase Start

2 “1,7,9” 224 65 Start /pickup L2 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 B Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 66 Start /pickup L3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 C Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 64 Start /pickup L1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 A Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 65 Start /pickup L2 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 B Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 66 Start /pickup L3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 C Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 64 Start /pickup L1 ✓ ✓ 2 I>3 A Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 65 Start /pickup L2 ✓ ✓ 2 I>3 B Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 66 Start /pickup L3 ✓ ✓ 2 I>3 C Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 64 Start /pickup L1 ✓ ✓ 3 I>4 A Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 65 Start /pickup L2 ✓ ✓ 3 I>4 B Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 66 Start /pickup L3 ✓ ✓ 3 I>4 C Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 64 Start /pickup L1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 Ssytem Backup A Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 65 Start /pickup L2 ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 Ssytem Backup B Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 66 Start /pickup L3 ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 Ssytem Backup C Phase Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 IN>1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 IN>2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ 2 IN>3 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ 3 IN>4 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 ISEF>1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ 5 ISEF>2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 8 VN>1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 9 VN>2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 67 Start /pickup N ✓ ✓ 10 100% Stator Earth fault Start
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Any Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 1 System Backup trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 2 V<1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 3 V<2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 V>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 5 V>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 6 F<1 Trip
Page 70 of 82
P341 P342 P343
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 10 F>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 11 F>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 12 Power 1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 13 Power 2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 14 Field Failure 1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 15 Field Failure 2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 16 V/Hz Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ 17 df/dt Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ 18 Voltage Vector Shift Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 19 NPS Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ 20 Restrictive Earth Fault Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ 21 100% Sator Earth Fault Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ 22 Generator Differential Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ 23 Dead Machine Trip
2 “1,7” 224 68 General Trip ✓ ✓ 24 Any RTD Trip
2 “1,7” 224 69 Trip L1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 Phase A Trip
2 “1,7” 224 70 Trip L2 ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 Phase B Trip
2 “1,7” 224 71 Trip L3 ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 Phase C Trip
2 “1,7” 224 69 Trip L1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 Phase A Trip
2 “1,7” 224 70 Trip L2 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 Phase B Trip
2 “1,7” 224 71 Trip L3 ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 I>2 Phase C Trip
2 “1,7” 224 69 Trip L1 ✓ 2 I>3 Phase A Trip
2 “1,7” 224 70 Trip L2 ✓ 2 I>3 Phase B Trip
2 “1,7” 224 71 Trip L3 ✓ 2 I>3 Phase C Trip
2 “1,7” 224 69 Trip L1 ✓ 3 I>4 Phase A Trip
2 “1,7” 224 70 Trip L2 ✓ 3 I>4 Phase B Trip
2 “1,7” 224 71 Trip L3 ✓ 3 I>4 Phase C Trip
2 “1,7” 224 69 Trip L1 ✓ ✓ 4 System Backup Phase A Trip
2 “1,7” 224 70 Trip L2 ✓ ✓ 4 SysBack Phase B Trip
2 “1,7” 224 71 Trip L3 ✓ ✓ 4 SysBack Phase C Trip
2 “1,7” 72 Trip I>> (back up)
4 “1,7” 73 Fault Location in ohms
2 “1,7” 74 Fault forward
2 “1,7” 75 Fault reverse
2 “1,7” 76 Teleprotection signal sent
2 “1,7” 77 Teleprotection signal received
2 “1,7” 78 Zone 1
2 “1,7” 79 Zone 2
2 “1,7” 80 Zone 3
2 “1,7” 81 Zone 4
2 “1,7” 82 Zone 5
2 “1,7” 83 Zone 6
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Any Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ 1 System Backup Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2 V<1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 3 V<2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 V>1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5 V>2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 6 F<1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 10 F>1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 11 F>2 Start
Page 71 of 82
P341 P342 P343
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 12 Power 1 start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 13 Power 2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ 14 Field Failure 1 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ 15 Field Failure 2 Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ ✓ 16 V/Hz Start
2 “1,7,9” 224 84 General Start ✓ ✓ 17 df/dt Start
2 “1,7” 224 85 Breaker Failure ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 CB Fail Alarm
2 “1,7” 86 Trip measuring system L1
2 “1,7” 89 Trip measuring system E
2 “1,7” 224 90 Trip I> ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 I>1 trip
2 “1,7” 224 90 Trip I> ✓ 1 I>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 91 Trip I>> ✓ 0 I>3 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 91 Trip I>> ✓ ✓ 0 I>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 91 Trip I>> ✓ 1 I>4 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 92 Trip IN> ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 IN>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 92 Trip IN> ✓ 1 IN>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 92 Trip IN> ✓ 2 ISEF>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 92 Trip IN> ✓ 3 ISEF>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 92 Trip IN> ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 VN>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ 0 IN>3 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ ✓ 0 IN>2 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ 1 IN>4 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ ✓ 1 ISEF>1 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ 2 ISEF>3 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ 3 ISEF>4 Trip
2 “1,7” 224 93 Trip IN>> ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 VN>2 Trip
Auto-Reclose Indications (Monitor)

1 “1,7” 128 CB ‘on’ by A/R
1 “1,7” 129 CB ‘on’ by long time A/R
1 “1,7,9” 130 AR blocked
Measurands (Monitor)
3.1 “2,7” 144 Measurand I
3.2 “2,7” 145 “Measurands I,V”
3.3 “2,7” 146 “Measurands I,V,P,Q”
3.4 “2,7” 147 “Measurands IN,VEN”
9 “2,7” 224 148 “Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f” ✓ ✓ ✓ 0
Generic Functions(Monitor)
10 “42,43” 240 Read Headings
10 “42,43” 241 Read attributes of all entries of a group
10 “42,43” 243 Read directory of entry
10 “1,2,7,9,11,12,42,43” 244 Real attribute of entry
10 10 245 End of GGI
10 “41,44” 249 Write entry with confirm
10 “40,41” 250 Write entry with execute
10 40 251 Write entry aborted
Page 72 of 82
Standard Information numbers in control direction
P341 P342 P343
System Functions (Control)
7 9 0 Init General Interrogation 0
6 8 224 Time Syncronisation ✓ ✓ ✓ 255
General Commands
20 20 16 Auto-recloser on/off
20 20 17 Teleprotection on/off
20 20 18 Protection on/off
20 20 224 19 LED Reset ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Reset Indications and latches
20 20 224 23 Activate characteristic 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 0 Group 1 Active
Generic Functions
21 42 240 Read headings of all defined groups
21 42 241 Read single attribute of all entries of a group
21 42 243 Read directory of single entry
21 42 244 Read attribute of sngle entry
21 9 245 Generic General Interrogation (GGI)
10 40 248 Write entry
10 40 249 Write with confirm
10 40 250 Write with execute
10 40 251 Write entry abort
* Note the value in this column is added to the station address to produce the common address of the ASDU
Basic Application Functions

Test Mode ✓
Blocking of monitor direction ✕
Disturbance data ✕
Generic services ✕
Private data ✕
Miscellaneous
Max .MVAL = times rated value
Measurand 1.2 2.4
Current L1 ✓
Current L2 ✓
Current L3 ✓
Voltage L1-E ✓
Voltage L2-E ✓
Voltage L3-E ✓
Active Power P ✓
Reactive Power Q ✓
Frequency f ✓
Voltage L1-L2
Page 73 of 82
DDB No Source Description English Text P341 P342 P343

0 Output Condition Output Relay 1 Output Label 1 (Setting) * * *
7 Output Condition Output Relay 8 Output Label 8 (Setting) *
14 Unused
15 Unused
16 Unused
17 Unused
18 Unused
19 Unused
20 Unused
21 Unused
22 Unused
23 Unused
24 Unused
25 Unused
26 Unused
27 Unused
28 Unused
29 Unused
30 Unused
31 Unused
32 Opto Opto Input 1 Opto Label 1 (setting) * * *
40 Opto Opto Input 9 Opto Label 9 (setting) *
48 Unused
49 Unused
50 Unused
51 Unused
52 Unused
53 Unused
54 Unused
Page 74 of 82

55 Unused
56 Unused
57 Unused
58 Unused
59 Unused
60 Unused
61 Unused
62 Unused
63 Unused
64 Output Condition Programmable LED 1 LED 1 * * *
72 PSL Input to Relay Output Condition Relay 1 * * *
79 PSL Input to Relay Output Condition Relay 8 *
86 PSL Input to LED Output Condition LED Cond IN 1 * * *
94 PSL Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 Timer in 1 * * *
102 Auxiliary Timer Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 Timer out 1 * * *
Page 75 of 82

110 PSL Trigger for Fault Recorder Fault_REC_TRIG * * *
111 Group Selection Setting Group via opto invalid Alarm SG-opto Invalid * * *
112 Commission Test Test Mode Enabled Alarm Prot’n Disabled * * *
113 VT Supervision VTS Indication VT Fail Alarm * * *
114 CT Supervision CTS Indication CT Fail Alarm * * *
115 Breaker Fail Breaker Fail Any Trip CB Fail Alarm * * *
116 CB Monitoring Broken Current Maintenance Alarm I^ Maint Alarm * * *
117 CB Monitoring Broken Current Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm * * *
118 CB Monitoring No of CB Ops Maintenance Alarm CB Ops Maint * * *
119 CB Monitoring No of CB Ops Maintenance Lockout CB Ops Lockout * * *
120 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Op Time Maintenance Alarm CB Op Time Maint * * *
121 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Op Time Lockout Alarm CB Op Time Lock * * *
122 CB Monitoring Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm Fault Freq Lock * * *
123 CB Status CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB auxilliary contacts) CB Status Alarm * * *
124 CB Control CB Failed to Trip Alarm Man CB Trip Fail * * *
125 CB Control CB Failed to Close Alarm Man CB Cls Fail * * *
126 CB Control CB Unhealthy on Control Close Alarm Man CB Unhealthy * * *
127 Frequency Tracking Frequency out of range F out of range *
127 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Alarm NPS Alarm * *
128 Overfluxing Volts Per Hz Alarm V/Hz Alarm * *
129 Field Failure Field failure Alarm Field Fail Alarm * *
130 RTD Thermal RTD thermal Alarm RTD Thermal Alm * *
131 RTD Thermal RTD open circuit failure RTD Open Cct * *
132 RTD Thermal RTD short circuit failure RTD short Cct * *
133 RTD Thermal RTD data inconsistency error RTD Data Error * *
134 RTD Thermal RTD Board failure RTD Board Fail * *
135 PSL Frequency protection alarm Freq Prot Alm * * *
136 PSL Voltage protection alarm Voltage Prot Alm * * *
137 PSL User settable alarm 1 User Alarm 1 * * *
141 PSL Block System Backup Time Delay SysBack Timer Bk * *
142 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay I>1 Timer Block * * *
143 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay I>2 Timer Block * * *
144 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay I>3 Timer Block *
145 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay I>4 Timer Block *
146 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay IN>1 Timer Block * * *
147 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay IN>2 Timer Block * * *
148 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay IN>3 Timer Block *
149 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay IN>4 Timer Block *
150 PSL Block SEF Stage 1 time delay ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * *
151 PSL Block SEF Stage 2 time delay ISEF>2 Timer Blk *
154 PSL Logic Input Trip CB Trip CB *
155 PSL Logic Input Close CB Close CB *
156 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay VN>1 Timer Blk * * *
157 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay VN>2 Timer Blk * * *
158 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay V<1 Timer Block * * *
159 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay V<2 Timer Block * * *
160 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay V>1 Timer Block * * *
161 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 4 time delay V>2 Timer Block * * *
162 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer F<1 Timer Block * * *
Page 76 of 82

166 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer F>1 Timer Block * * *
167 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer F>2 Timer Block * * *
168 PSL External Trip 3ph External Trip 3ph * * *
169 PSL 52-A (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-A) * * *
170 PSL 52-B (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-B) * * *
171 PSL CB Healthy CB Healthy * * *
172 PSL MCB/VTS opto MCB/VTS * * *
173 PSL Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Close Dly * * *
174 PSL Reset Latched Relays & LED’s Reset LEDs * * *
175 PSL Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset Lockout * * *
176 PSL Reset CB Maintenance Values reset All Values * * *
177 PSL Reset NPS Thermal State Reset I2 Thermal * *
178 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 100% ST EF Trip *
179 Dead Machine Dead machine protection Trip DeadMachine trip *
180 Generator Differential Generator Differential trip 3ph Gen Diff Trip *
181 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip A Gen Diff Trip A *
182 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip B Gen Diff Trip B *
183 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip C Gen Diff Trip C *
184 Field Failure Field failure Stage 1 start Field Fail1 Trip * *
185 Field Failure Field failure Stage 2 start Field Fail2 Trip * *
186 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Trip NPS Trip * *
187 System Backup System Backup Trip 3ph Sys Back Trip * *
188 System Backup System Backup Trip A Sys Back Trip A * *
189 System Backup System Backup Trip B Sys Back Trip B * *
190 System Backup System Backup Trip C Sys Back Trip C * *
191 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Trip V/Hz Trip * *
192 RTD Thermal RTD 1 TRIP RTD 1 Trip * *
202 df/ft Rate of change of frequency Trip df/dt Trip *
202 RTD Thermal Any RTD Trip Any RTD Trip * *
203 Voltage Vector Shift Voltage vector shift trip V Shift Trip *
204 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Trip IN>1 Trip * * *
205 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Trip IN>2 Trip * * *
206 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Trip IN>3 Trip *
207 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Trip IN>4 Trip *
208 Restricted Earth Fault REF Trip IREF> Trip * * *
209 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Trip ISEF>1 Trip * * *
210 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>2 Trip *
211 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>3 Trip *
212 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Trip ISEF>4 Trip *
213 Neutral Displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>1 Trip * * *
214 Neutral Displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>2 Trip * * *
215 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<1 Trip * * *
216 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<1 Trip A/AB * * *
217 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<1 Trip B/BC * * *
Page 77 of 82

218 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<1 Trip C/CA * * *
219 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<2 Trip * * *
220 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<2 Trip A/AB * * *
221 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<2 Trip B/BC * * *
222 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<2 Trip C/CA * * *
223 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>1 Trip * * *
224 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>1 Trip A/AB * * *
225 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>1 Trip B/BC * * *
226 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>1 Trip C/CA * * *
227 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>2 Trip * * *
228 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>2 Trip A/AB * * *
229 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>2 Trip B/BC * * *
230 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>2 Trip C/CA * * *
231 Under Frequency Under frequency Stage 1 trip F<1 Trip * * *
235 Over Frequency Over frequency Stage 1 Trip F>1 Trip * * *
236 Over Frequency Over frequency Stage 2 Trip F>2 Trip * * *
237 Power Power stage 1 trip Power1 Trip * * *
238 Power Power stage 2 trip Power2 Trip * * *
239 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>1 Trip * * *
240 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip A I>1 Trip A * * *
241 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip B I>1 Trip B * * *
242 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip C I>1 Trip C * * *
243 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>2 Trip * * *
244 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip A I>2 Trip A * * *
245 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip B I>2 Trip B * * *
246 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip C I>2 Trip C * * *
247 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>3 Trip *
248 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip A I>3 Trip A *
249 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip B I>3 Trip B *
250 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip C I>3 Trip C *
251 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>4 Trip *
252 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip A I>4 Trip A *
253 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip B I>4 Trip B *
254 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip C I>4 Trip C *
255 All protection Any Start Any Start * * *
256 Neutral displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Start VN>1 Start * * *
257 Neutral displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start VN>2 Start * * *
258 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<1 Start * * *
259 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<1 Start A/AB * * *
260 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<1 Start B/BC * * *
261 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<1 Start C/CA * * *
262 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<2 Start * * *
263 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<2 Start A/AB * * *
264 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<2 Start B/BC * * *
265 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<2 Start C/CA * * *
266 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>1 Start * * *
267 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>1 Start A/AB * * *
268 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>1 Start B/BC * * *
269 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>1 Start C/CA * * *
270 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>2 Start * * *
271 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>2 Start A/AB * * *
272 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>2 Start B/BC * * *
Page 78 of 82

273 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>2 Start C/CA * * *
274 Power Power Stage 1 start Power1 Start * * *
275 Power Power stage 1 start Power2 Start * * *
276 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph I>1 Start * * *
277 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start A I>1 Start A * * *
278 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start B I>1 Start B * * *
279 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start C I>1 Start C * * *
280 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>2 Start * * *
281 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start A I>2 Start A * * *
282 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start B I>2 Start B * * *
283 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start C I>2 Start C * * *
284 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>3 Start *
285 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start A I>3 Start A *
286 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start B I>3 Start B *
287 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start C I>3 Start C *
288 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph I>4 Start *
289 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start A I>4 Start A *
290 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start B I>4 Start B *
291 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start C I>4 Start C *
292 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Start IN>1 Start * * *
293 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Start IN>2 Start * * *
294 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Start IN>3 Start *
295 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Start IN>4 Start *
296 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Start ISEF>1 Start * * *
297 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Start ISEF>2 Start *
298 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Start ISEF>3 Start *
299 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Start ISEF>4 Start *
300 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 100% ST EF Start *
301 Under Frequency Under frequency Stage 1 START F<1 Start * * *
305 Over Frequency Over frequency Stage 1 START F>1 Start * * *
306 Over Frequency Over frequency Stage 2 START F>2 Start * * *
307 VT Supervision VTS Fast Block VTS Fast Block * * *
308 VT Supervision VTS Slow Block VTS Slow Block * * *
309 CT Supervision CTS Block CTS Block * * *
310 Breaker failure tBF1 Trip 3Ph Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * *
311 Breaker failure tBF2 Trip 3Ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * *
312 CB Control Control Trip Control Trip *
313 CB Control Control Close Control Close *
314 CB Control Control Close in Progress Close in Prog *
315 Reconnection Reconnection Time Delay Output Reconnection *
316 Over Current “I> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail” I> BlockStart *
Over Current “IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start, inhibited by CB Fail” IN/SEF>Blk Start *
318 df/dt Rate of change of frequency Start df/dt Start *
319 Under Current IA< operate IA< Start * * *
320 Under Current IB< operate IB< Start * * *
321 Under Current IC< operate IC< Start * * *
322 Under Current ISEF< operate ISEF< Start * * *
323 Under Current IN< operate IN< Start * *
324 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Start V/Hz Start * *
325 Field Failure Field failure Stage 1 start FFail1 Start * *
326 Field Failure Field failure Stage 2 start FFail2 Start * *
327 System Backup System Backup Start 3Ph Sys Back Start * *
Page 79 of 82

328 System Backup System Backup Start A Sys Back Start A * *
329 System Backup System Backup Start B Sys Back Start B * *
330 System Backup System Backup Start C Sys Back Start C * *
331 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Alarm RTD 1 Alarm * *
341 CB Monitoring Composite lockout alarm Lockout Alarm * * *
342 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Open CB Open 3 ph * * *
343 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Closed CB Closed 3 ph * * *
344 Field Voltage Monitor Field Voltage Failure Field Volts Fail * * *
345 Poledead All Poles Dead (Hidden from PSL) * * *
346 Poledead Any Pole Dead (Hidden from PSL) * * *
347 Poledead Phase A Pole Dead (Hidden from PSL) * * *
348 Poledead Phase B Pole Dead (Hidden from PSL) * * *
349 Poledead Phase C Pole Dead (Hidden from PSL) * * *
350 VT Supervision Accelerate Ind (Hidden from PSL) * * *
351 VT Supervision Any Voltage Dependent (Hidden from PSL) * * *
352 VT Supervision Ia over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
353 VT Supervision Ib over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
354 VT Supervision Ic over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
355 VT Supervision Va over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
356 VT Supervision Vb over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
357 VT Supervision Vc over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
358 VT Supervision I2 over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
359 VT Supervision V2 over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
360 VT Supervision Superimposed Ia over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
361 VT Supervision Superimposed Ib over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
362 VT Supervision Superimposed Ic over threshold (Hidden from PSL) * * *
363 CB Failure CBF current prot SEF stage trip (Hidden from PSL) * * *
364 CB Failure CBF non current prot stage trip (Hidden from PSL) * * *
365 CB Failure CBF current Prot SEF Trip (Hidden from PSL) * * *
366 CB Failure CBF Non Current Prot Trip (Hidden from PSL) * * *
367 Frequency tracking Freq High (Hidden from PSL) * * *
368 Frequency tracking Freq Low (Hidden from PSL) * * *
369 Frequency tracking Freq Not found (Hidden from PSL) * * *
370 Frequency tracking Stop Freq Track (Hidden from PSL) * * *
371 Reconnection Reconnect LOM (unqualified) (Hidden from PSL) *
372 Reconnection Reconnect Disable (unqualified) (Hidden from PSL) *
373 Reconnection Reconnect LOM (Hidden from PSL) *
374 Reconnection Reconnect Disable (Hidden from PSL) *
375 Unused
376 Unused
377 Unused
378 Unused
379 Unused
380 Unused
381 Unused
382 Unused
Page 80 of 82

383 Unused
384 Unused
385 Unused
386 Unused
387 Unused
388 Unused
389 Unused
390 Unused
391 Unused
392 Unused
393 Unused
394 Unused
395 Unused
396 Unused
397 Unused
398 Unused
399 Unused
400 Unused
401 Unused
402 Unused
403 Unused
404 Unused
405 Unused
406 Unused
407 Unused
408 Unused
409 Unused
410 Unused
411 Unused
412 PSL PSL Internal Node 1 * * *
Page 81 of 82

Page 82 of 82

Technical Guide
Appendix B
External Connection Diagrams
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Appendix B
Page 1 of 2
Figure 1: External connection diagram. Generator protection relay for (40TE) small
generator
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS Appendix B
Page 2 of 2
Figure 2: External connection diagram. Generator protection relay with (60TE)

differential 100% stator E/F and dead machine

Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tg8614a P342, P343 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Guide

Types MiCOM P342, P343

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Functional *earth terminal.

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing

Equipment operating conditions

Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include

Insulation class: IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 This equipment requires a

Installation IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Distribution level, fixed

Environment: IEC 61010-1:1990/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated by

Product safety: 73/23/EEC Compliance with the European

EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Compliance is demonstrated

Figure 1 Relay front view 4

Section 1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM

MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply

MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the

Section 2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM

Volume 1 Technical Guide

Appendix A Relay menu database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC60870-5-103

Volume 2 Operation Guide

Section 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Serial No and I*,V Ratings Top cover

Figure 1: Relay front view

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Optional IRIG-B board Digital input connections

Rear comms port

Current* and voltage Digital output

Figure 2: Relay rear view

3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Keypad/LCD Courier Modbus IEC60870

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

3.3 Menu structure

Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups

System data View records Overcurrent Earth fault

Control & support Group 1

Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4

Figure 3: Menu structure

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

3.3.1 Protection settings

3.4 Password protection

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Access Level Operations Enabled

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

System Other default displays

Date and time

Column 1 Column 2 Column n

Data 1.1 Data 2.1 Data n.1

Other setting Other setting Other setting

Data 1.n Data 2.n Data n.n

Figure 4: Front panel user interface

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model.

Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link

Earth fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up

Remote serial communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The

Note: 2400V peak 2200V peak 2600V peak